Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Family
3
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Product Description, History, Major Product Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Nameplate Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Identifying Factory Original Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement and Upgrade Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement Guides
Miniature Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement Devices
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Molded-Case Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Circuit Protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Panelboard Replacement Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Control Center Replacement Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technology Upgrades for Circuit Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handle Mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement and Service Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cross-Reference
Westinghouse, Challenger and Bryant Replacements . . . . . . . . . .
Breaker Replacements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mining Breaker Replacements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pricing Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V12-T3-2
V12-T3-3
V12-T3-3
V12-T3-4
1
2
V12-T3-5
3
V12-T3-6
4
V12-T3-10
5
V12-T3-15
6
V12-T3-61
V12-T3-63
V12-T3-63
V12-T3-80
V12-T3-81
V12-T3-88
V12-T3-91
V12-T3-95
7
8
9
V12-T3-112
10
V12-T3-113
11
V12-T3-115
V12-T3-162
V12-T3-168
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
V12-T3-1
3
1
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Molded-Case
Circuit Breakers
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Molded-Case Circuit Breaker Family
Product Description
Product History
Originally a
Westinghouse Product
The need for molded-case
circuit breakers came about
in 1918 when numerous
applications for electrical
motors resulted in a demand
for a device that would
ensure safe operation and,
at the same time, protect
electrical circuits.
attempted to find a solution
to the problem. Meetings
with switch manufacturers
were initiated in an effort
to find a solution. Switch
manufacturers were asked to
develop a switching device
that would interrupt a circuit
under prolonged overload
conditions. The device would
have to be safe, reliable and
tamperproof. It should also
be resettable so as to be
reusable after an interruption
without replacing any parts.
This search for better circuit
protection resulted in many
different but unacceptable
approaches to the problem.
These early meetings and
subsequent efforts prepared
the groundwork for the
eventual development of the
molded-case circuit breaker.
Eaton’s molded-case circuit
breakers are designed to
provide circuit protection
for low voltage distribution
systems. They are described
by NEMA® as “. . . a device
for closing and interrupting
a circuit between separable
contacts under both normal
and abnormal conditions,”
and furthermore as “. . . a
breaker assembled as an
integral unit in supporting
an enclosed housing of
insulating material.” The
NEC® describes them as
“. . . a device designed to
open and close a circuit by
non-automatic means, and to
open the circuit automatically
on a predetermined overload
of current, without injury to
itself when properly applied
within its rating.”
During this period, individual
motors were used for the
first time in industrial plants
to operate machine tools and
in private homes to operate
appliances. Plant electricians
were constantly changing
fuses blown during motor
startups because of the lack
of properly designed fuses for
motor circuit protection.
Homes experienced similar
problems when electrical
circuits were overloaded.
Inspectors were concerned
about fire hazards because of
plug fuses being bridged with
pennies and the installation
of fuses with too high an
ampere rating.
Circuit breakers protect
against overloads in
conductors and protects
against short circuits in
connected apparatus such as
motors and motor starters.
Time Line—Major Product Introductions
Circuit breakers are designed
for use in panelboards,
switchboards, motor control
centers, control panels,
combination starters,
individual enclosures and
bus duct plug-in units.
Inspection authorities
became involved and
After intensive research and
development, Westinghouse
produced the DE-ION® arc
extinguisher for use in large
oil circuit breakers. Although
too large in its initial form to
be practical for small circuit
breakers, the arc extinguisher
was eventually modified
into a usable size. The first
compact, workable circuit
breaker was developed in
Year
Product
1923
First compact, workable circuit breaker developed by Westinghouse
1927
Westinghouse introduced the first complete circuit breaker line,
rated 10– 600A, 600V
1939
Along with ordering information and style numbers, the various
maximum current ratings came to be known by frame designations:
50A
100A
100A
225A
600A
Motor Circuit Protector (MCP) introduced—first sensitive, low
level protection designed specifically for motor circuits
1973
SELTRONIC™ introduced—first molded-case circuit breaker
with an electronic trip unit
1979
Current Limit-R circuit breaker introduced— first true current
limiting trip unit
1982
Series C® Family introduced—new world-class standard, meeting
increasing interrupting requirements without sacrificing compact size
21
1994
Westinghouse Distribution and Control Business Unit (DCBU)
acquired by Eaton, integrated with Cutler-Hammer
(the Cutler-Hammer line of molded case circuit breakers was
sold when merged with Westinghouse)
22
1995
OPTIM™ Family introduced—first truly programmable
molded-case circuit breaker
20
23
Since that initial introduction
in 1927, Westinghouse
continued to be at the forefront
of circuit breaker technology
with an unprecedented series
of circuit protective
enhancements and
introductions as chronicled
below. In 1994, Eaton, another
world-class technology leader,
acquired the Westinghouse
Distribution and Control
Business Unit (DCBU)
and integrated it with their
Cutler-Hammer business
unit forming a powerful, new
combination, poised to meet
the challenges of the next
100 years.
1950 1960 1970 1980 1990
1995
E-Frame
F-Frame (non-interchangeable trip)
G-Frame
K-Frame
L-Frame
1970
19
1920 1930 1940
1923 when the modified arc
extinguisher was coupled
with a thermal tripping
mechanism. It was not until
four years later, however,
that Westinghouse research
engineers found the ideal
combination of materials and
design that permitted circuit
breakers to interrupt fault
currents of 5000A at 120 Vac
or Vdc. One year later,
Westinghouse placed the
first circuit breaker on the
market. Its acceptance
was instantaneous.
2002
Next Generation E125, J250
2004
Series G® First Global Breaker Line
24
25
V12-T3-2
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
2000
2002 Present
3
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Breaker Identification
Accessories
Nameplate Data
A circuit breaker is identified by
data found on the nameplate.
Most circuit breaker
accessories are mounted
internally and are not visible
with a quick inspection.
However, because many
accessories rely on or supply
an external signal, there may
be electrical leads exiting the
circuit breaker case. Inspect
for these leads when
obtaining full descriptive
information for circuit breaker
replacement. Examples of
common accessories:
This includes:
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Catalog number
Shop order number
Style number
Amperage
Number of poles
Voltage class
Temperature rating
In most instances, the
catalog number, style number
or shop order number will
supply enough information
to identify the circuit breaker.
However, it is always
advisable to obtain all
data from the nameplate
to facilitate identification.
A Catalog Number begins
with a series of letters
followed by numbers
that identify:
●
●
●
●
Circuit breaker type
Number of poles
Maximum amperage
Example: Catalog number
F3020 indicates a Type F
circuit breaker, three poles,
20A
A Shop Order Number
begins with one or two
numbers followed by a
single letter and four
additional numbers.
A shop order number is
listed in place of a catalog
number and indicates that the
circuit breaker was modified
at the factory, i.e., addition
of a shunt trip, special
calibration, etc. Every shop
order number must be
researched with the
factory to properly identify
modifications. Call your
Cutler-Hammer Field Sales
office for this information.
●
Shunt Trip
Used to remotely trip the
circuit breaker using an
electrical signal. Typically
two wires extend through
the case.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Pre-Series C Breaker with Original Label (Labels updated in 1997)
8
9
Undervoltage Release (UVR)
Trips the circuit breaker
when voltage drops below
a specified percentage of
coil voltage (typically 70%).
Typically two wires extend
through the case.
Auxiliary Switch
Provides remote indication
of the circuit breaker status
(open/closed). Typically
three wires extend through
the case in a single-pole
1A/1B application.
7
10
11
12
Series C Breaker with Original Label (Labels updated in 1997)
13
14
Alarm Lockout Switch
For remote indication of
an automatic trip operation.
Typically two or three wires
extend through the case.
15
16
17
Vintage Label for Typical SELTRONIC Molded-Case Circuit Breaker
19
20
21
Example: 70E2121
22
Note: Eaton does not
recommend replacing a circuit
breaker identified by a Shop
Order Number with a standard
“off-the-shelf” circuit breaker
without first identifying the
modifications. They may
be critical to safe and
reliable operation.
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
18
23
24
25
V12-T3-3
3
1
2
3
4
5
Factory Original
Circuit Breakers
Why Insist on Only Genuine,
New MCCBs Purchased Through
Authorized Distributors?
Eaton defines “New” product
as that which has not yet been
installed in an electrical circuit,
purchased through authorized
channels in factory original
condition and packaged in
unopened Eaton cartons.
●
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
●
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
●
The only way to ensure
safe and reliable operation
of your system is to use
genuine, new, Eaton’s
Cutler-Hammer products
exclusively. Eaton does not
resell the component parts
for molded-case circuit
breakers, the only way
for third-party breaker
refurbishers to get parts
for the breakers that
they are rebuilding is
to cannibalize other
used breakers or to use
counterfeit components.
Neither is a very good
option for the end user
In some cases,
unauthorized resellers
of molded-case circuit
breakers have been found
to misrepresent used,
rebuilt or surplus products.
Only products purchased as
“new” through authorized
channels are covered under
the Eaton warranty policy
There have been
instances where third-party
refurbishers have rebuilt
breakers using the wrong
parts, with parts missing
or the factory lubrication
removed in the cleaning
process—any of which may
result in devices that may
not be depended upon to
function properly to protect
equipment and personnel
Identifying Genuine, Factory
Original Westinghouse Circuit
Breakers Manufactured by Eaton
The features on a molded-case
circuit breaker that identify it
as genuine or counterfeit
may or may not be readily
apparent. In fact, there may be
differences not detectable by
an external investigation.
A genuine Eaton brand
molded-case circuit breaker
manufactured by Eaton will
have a serialized bar code
unique to the breaker as well
as an unbroken seal where
the case comes together.
This barcode and seal were
placed at the factory and
ensures the internal integrity
of the breaker. If, for any
reason the barcode is
missing or the seal is
broken, do not accept the
breaker. (Seal does not
appear on interchangeable
trip breakers.)
Another way to tell if a
breaker has been tampered
with is to examine the sealant
used to cover the screws on
the top rear of the breaker. If
the sealant appears sloppy or
is missing, it indicates that the
unit may have been subjected
to tampering.
If front cover screw shows
marks from use, someone
has attempted to open the
breaker. The front covers
are either black or gray on
genuine Westinghouse
molded-case circuit breakers.
Front Cover Screws
Sealant Used to Cover Screws
A UL® label on a genuine
Westinghouse breaker is
either exactly as shown in
the photo or is stamped in
white ink onto the frame in
older pre-Series C breakers.
Anything other than this may
indicate fraud.
Westinghouse moldedcase circuit breakers
manufactured by Eaton
are packed individually and
shipped in Eaton labeled
cartons. Anything other than
this is not to be considered
new and should be suspect.
Unbroken Seal
There is a manufacturing date
code on the back of genuine
molded-case circuit breakers
stamped in silver and white. If
this coding is missing, it may
mean the breaker has been
subjected to tampering.
Frequently, this date code is
wiped off in an attempt to
represent the breaker as new.
XX-XXX-XXXX
Product Name
Product Series
UL Label
Adpiscing
elit sed
diamnon
euismod
xxxxxxxxx
Eaton Labeled Cartons
23
24
Manufacturing Date Code
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
Amet Elit
Lorem Ipsum: dolor sit
amet, consectetuer adi
piscing elit, sed diam
nonummy nibh euismod
A
www.eaton.com
22
V12-T3-4
Dolor Sit
Made in U.S.A.
21
25
DOLOR SIT AMET
CONSECT ETUER ADI
Lorem ipsum: dolor sit amet,
consectetuter adipleiscing,
sed diam nonummy, nibheuis
mod tincidunt.
3
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
Series C and Series G MoldedCase Circuit Breakers
When and Where to Use
●
Generally a first choice
wherever physically and
electrically practical
●
Where communications,
arc flash protection,
energy and power quality
monitoring are desired
●
As a direct replacement
or add-on to already
installed Series C or
Series G product, including
Westinghouse breakers
(see Page V12-T3-114)
●
For special applications
such as DC engine
generator
Advantages
●
The most current
molded-case circuit
breaker technology
●
Higher interrupting
capacities in each
frame size
●
Smaller and lighter for
a given frame size than
other options
●
Generally less expensive
than other replacement
breaker options
●
Readily available
throughout range, high
levels of stock
●
Available from stock
●
One-year warranty
Current Production Replacement
Circuit Breakers
When and Where to Use
●
As a direct, one-for-one
replacement of current
production pre-Series C
product
●
Where you know the
catalog/style number
but not the physical or
electrical specifics about
the application
Advantages
●
Ease of selection and
certainty of replacement
●
Guaranteed to be both a
physical and electrical
duplicate of original
●
Still in production
●
Newly manufactured
●
UL listed
●
Available from stock
●
One-year warranty
Replacement of Current
Panelboard Molded-Case
Circuit Breakers
When and Where to Use
●
When replacing Series C
circuit breakers in a current
design panelboard
Advantages
●
Newly manufactured
and tested to the latest
technology
●
UL Listed
●
Available from stock in
most frame sizes
●
One-year warranty. Refer
to Page V12-T3-91 for
Series C connector kits
Replacement of Out-ofProduction Panelboard
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
(Including Westinghouse)
When and Where to Use
●
When replacing out-ofproduction circuit breakers
in an existing panelboard
●
When replacing
Westinghouse breakers.
Refer to Pages V12-T3-81–
V12-T3-90 and
Page V12-T3-114
Advantages
Newly manufactured
and tested to the latest
applicable standards
●
Both physically and
electrically interchangeable
with the circuit breakers
that they are designed
to replace
●
UL Listed
●
Available from stock in
most frame sizes
●
One-year warranty
●
Replacement of Out-ofProduction Motor Control Center
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
and Upgrades
When and Where to Use
●
When replacing out-ofproduction circuit breakers
in an existing motor control
center: 5 Star, Type W and
F10 designs
●
When upgrading
Westinghouse breakers
with a Series C technology
upgrade breaker
Advantages
●
Newly manufactured
and tested to the latest
technology
●
Series C retrofit kits are
physically and electrically
interchangeable with the
circuit breakers that they
are designed to replace
●
UL Listed
●
Available from stock in
most frame sizes
●
One-year warranty.
Refer to Page V12-T3-91
Service for Molded-Case
Circuit Breakers
When and Where to Use
●
Where circuit breaker has
sustained minor physical
damage to a handle, lug,
etc., that otherwise would
be fully functional
●
Large frame circuit breaker
(600A and above) that has
experienced some normal
wear, but is in generally
good condition, as an
economically driven
alternative to new
●
When replacing
Westinghouse breakers.
Refer to Page V12-T3-114
1
Advantages
Prevents loss of circuit
breakers due to minor
damage
●
Reduces overall
breaker costs
●
Prevents use of potentially
unreliable third-party
refurbishers
●
Includes full one-year
Eaton Electrical Inc.
warranty
●
Ensures reliability through
dealing with the original
manufacturer with a long
and well-recognized
tradition of product safety,
integrity and quality
●
Provides a simple and
convenient solution
8
●
Contact Eaton’s
Breaker Service Center:
1-877-BRK-SRVC.
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Contact: 1-800-OLD-UNIT.
23
24
25
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
V12-T3-5
3
1
2
3
4
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
QUICKLAG and Eaton Miniature Circuit Breaker Replacement Guide
QUICKLAG and Eaton Plug-In Industrial Circuit Breakers—Dimensions in Inches
Maximum Amperes
Description
150A
125A
100A
30A
HQP
QPHW
QHPX
QHPW
Width: 1.00
Height: 2.94
Depth: 2.38
Width: 1.00
Height: 2.94
Depth: 2.38
Width: 1.00
Height: 2.94
Depth: 2.38
Width: 1.00
Height: 2.94
Depth: 2.38
No previous circuit
breaker existed
QHPL
QHP
Current Design
These circuit breakers replace the out-of-production
circuit breakers listed below.
5
6
7
Out-of-Production Westinghouse Circuit Breakers
8
These circuit breakers are no longer
manufactured. Recommended QUICKLAG circuit
breakers listed above.
9
QUICKLAG Bolt-On Industrial Circuit Breakers—Dimensions in Inches
10
11
HQNPL, HQNPAL, HQNP,
QPH
HQNPA, QP, QPA, QPAH, QNPL,
QNPAL, QNP, Type P, PL
Maximum Amperes
Description
150A
125A
100A
30A
BAB
QBHW
HBAX
HBAW
Width: 1.00
Height: 2.94
Depth: 2.38
Width: 1.00
Height: 2.94
Depth: 2.38
Width: 1.00
Height: 2.94
Depth: 2.38
Width: 1.00
Height: 2.94
Depth: 2.38
QBH
No previous circuit
breaker existed
HBA
Current Design
These circuit breakers replace the out-of-production
circuit breakers listed below.
12
13
14
15
16
Out-of-Production Westinghouse Circuit Breakers
These circuit breakers are no longer
manufactured. Recommended QUICKLAG circuit
breakers listed above.
HQNB, HQNBA, QB, BA,
QNBL, QNBAL
17
QUICKLAG and Eaton Cable-In/Cable-Out Industrial Circuit Breakers—Dimensions in Inches
18
Description
19
20
Maximum Amperes
60A
100A
100A
100A
30A
40A
QC
QCHW
QHCX
QHCW
WMZ/FAZ
Width: 1.00
Height: 3.75
Depth: 2.44
Width: 1.00
Height: 3.75
Depth: 2.44
Width: 1.00
Height: 3.75
Depth: 2.44
Width: 1.00
Height: 3.75
Depth: 2.44
Width: 0.70
Height: 4.10
Depth: 2.60
HQCL, HQCAL, HQC,
HQCA, QCA
QCH
No previous circuit
breaker existed
QHCL, QHC
WMT
Current Design
These circuit breakers replace the
out-of-production circuit breakers
listed below.
QCR
QCF
21
22
23
Width: 0.50
Height: 3.94
Depth: 2.44
Out-of-Production Westinghouse Circuit Breakers
24
These circuit breakers are no
longer manufactured. Recommended
QUICKLAG circuit breakers listed above.
25
Note: For supplementary protectors, the Eaton WMZS and FAZ Series replace the WMS supplementary protectors that are no longer manufactured.
V12-T3-6
No previous circuit
breaker existed
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
3
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
QUICKLAG Miniature
Circuit Breakers
QUICKLAG is the largest and
most complete family of
industrial thermal-magnetic
miniature circuit breakers.
They provide the exclusive
features of steel frame
calibration and arc chutes
in every pole.
with larger Westinghouse/
Cutler-Hammer current
limiting circuit breakers.
QUICKLAG circuit breakers
are provided in ranges from
5 to 125A continuous in
single-, two- and three-pole
configurations with
interrupting capacities from
10,000 AIC to 65,000 AIC.
QUICKLAG circuit breakers
have been series rated up to
200,000 AIC in conjunction
Each QUICKLAG rating is
available for plug-in (Type P),
bolt-on (Type B) and cable-tocable connections (Type C)
for line/load feed applications.
They are also available with
one of the industry’s widest
selection of accessories,
including shunt trip, and
can be custom modified
to meet special application
requirements.
1
2
3
4
5
Circuit Breaker Selection Guide
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Circuit
Breaker
Type Code
Continuous
Ampere
Rating at 40°C
No.
of
Poles
Volts
AC
DC
Federal
Spec.
W-C-375b
HQP
P
5–70
1
120/240
24, 48, 80
10a, 11a, 12a
6
UL Listed Interrupting Ratings rms Symmetrical Amperes
DC 1
AC Ratings Volts
120
120/240
240
24
48
80
—
10,000
—
5000
5000
2000
HQP
P
10–125
2
120/240
24, 48, 80
10a, 12a
—
10,000
—
5000
5000
5000
HQP
P
10–100
2, 3
240
—
10b, 11b, 12b
—
—
10,000
—
—
—
QPHW
P
15–70
1
120/240
24, 48, 80
14a
—
22,000
—
5000
5000
2000
QPHW
P
15–125
2
120/240
24, 48, 80
14a
—
22,000
—
5000
5000
5000
QPHW
P
15–100
2, 3
240
—
14b
—
—
22,000
—
—
—
QHPX
P
15–70
1
120/240
24, 48, 80
—
—
42,000
—
5000
5000
2000
QHPX
P
15–100
2
120/240
24, 48, 80
—
—
42,000
—
5000
5000
5000
QHPX
P
15–100
3
240
—
—
—
—
42,000
—
—
—
QHPW
P
15–30
1
120/240
24, 48, 80
15a
—
65,000
—
5000
5000
2000
QHPW
P
15–30
2
120/240
24, 48, 80
15a
—
65,000
—
5000
5000
5000
QHPW
P
15–30
3
240
—
15b
—
—
65,000
—
—
—
QPGF
P, GF
15–30
1
120
—
10a, 11a, 12a
10,000
—
—
—
—
—
QPGF
P, GF
15–50
2
120/240
—
10a, 11a, 12a
—
10,000
—
—
—
—
QPHGF
P, GF
15–30
1
120
—
10a, 11a, 12a
22,000
—
—
—
—
—
QPHGF
P, GF
15–50
2
120/240
—
10a, 11a, 12a
—
22,000
—
—
—
—
QPGFEP
P, GFEP
15–30
1
120
—
—
10,000
—
—
—
—
—
QPGFEP
P, GFEP
15–50
2
120/240
—
—
—
10,000
—
—
—
—
QPHGFEP
P, GFEP
15–30
1
120
—
—
22,000
—
—
—
—
—
QPHGFEP
P, GFEP
15–30
2
120/240
—
—
22,000
—
—
—
—
—
BAB
B
5–70
1
120/240
24, 48, 80
10a, 11a, 12a
—
10,000
—
5000
5000
2000
BAB
B
10–125
2
120/240
24, 48, 80
10a, 12a
—
10,000
—
5000
5000
5000
BAB
B
10–100
2, 3
240
—
10b, 11b, 12b
—
—
10,000
—
—
—
QBHW
B
15–70
1
120/240
24, 48, 80
14a
—
22,000
—
5000
5000
2000
QBHW
B
15–125
2
120/240
24, 48, 80
14a
—
22,000
—
5000
5000
5000
QBHW
B
15–100
2, 3
240
—
14b
—
—
22,000
—
—
—
HBAX
B
15–70
1
120/240
24, 48, 80
—
—
42,000
—
5000
5000
2000
HBAX
B
15–100
2
120/240
24, 48, 80
—
—
42,000
—
5000
5000
5000
HBAX
B
15–100
3
240
—
—
—
—
42,000
—
—
—
HBAW
B
15–30
1
120/240
24, 48, 80
15a
—
65,000
—
5000
5000
2000
HBAW
B
15–30
2
120/240
24, 48, 80
15a
—
65,000
—
5000
5000
5000
HBAW
B
15–30
3
240
—
15b
—
—
65,000
—
—
—
QBGF
B, GF
15–30
1
120
—
10a, 11a, 12a
10,000
—
—
—
—
—
QBGF
B, GF
15–50
2
120/240
—
10a, 11a, 12a
—
10,000
—
—
—
—
Notes
1 Two-pole DC interrupting rating based on two poles connected in series.
Circuit breaker type codes: P Plug-in; B Bolt-on; C Cable-in/Cable-out; GF Ground Fault, 5 mA; GFEP Ground Fault, 30 mA.
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
V12-T3-7
3
1
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Circuit Breaker Selection Guide, continued
UL Listed Interrupting Ratings rms Symmetrical Amperes
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Circuit
Breaker
Type Code
Continuous
Ampere
Rating at 40°C
No.
of
Poles
Volts
AC
DC
Federal
Spec.
W-C-375b
120
120/240
240
24
48
QBHGF
B, GF
15–30
1
120
—
10a, 11a, 12a
22,000
—
—
—
—
—
3
QBHGF
B, GF
15–30
2
120/240
—
10a, 11a, 12a
—
22,000
—
—
—
—
QBGFEP
B, GFEP
15–30
1
120
—
—
10,000
—
—
—
—
—
4
QBGFEP
B, GFEP
15–50
2
120/240
—
—
—
10,000
—
—
—
—
QBHGFEP
B, GFEP
15–30
1
120
—
—
22,000
—
—
—
—
—
2
5
DC 1
AC Ratings Volts
80
QBHGFEP
B, GFEP
15–30
2
120/240
—
—
22,000
—
—
—
—
—
QC
C
5–70
1
120/240
24, 48, 80
10a, 11a, 12a
—
10,000
—
5000
5000
2000
6
QC
C
10–100
2
120/240
24, 48, 80
10a, 12a
—
10,000
—
5000
5000
5000
QC
C
10–100
2, 3
240
—
10b, 11b, 12b
—
—
10,000
—
—
—
7
QC
C
15–100
4
240
—
10b, 11b, 12b
—
—
10,000
—
—
—
QCF
C
10–60
1, 2
120/240
—
—
10,000
10,000
—
—
—
—
8
QCR
C
10–60
1, 2
120/240
—
—
10,000
10,000
—
—
—
—
QCHW
C
15–70
1
120/240
24, 48, 80
14a
—
22,000
—
5000
5000
2000
9
QCHW
C
15–100
2
120/240
24, 48, 80
14a
—
22,000
—
5000
5000
5000
QCHW
C
15–100
2, 3
240
—
14b
—
—
22,000
—
—
—
10
QHCX
C
15–70
1
120/240
24, 48, 80
—
—
42,000
—
5000
5000
2000
QHCX
C
15–100
2
120/240
24, 48, 80
—
—
42,000
—
5000
5000
5000
QHCX
C
15–100
3
240
—
—
—
—
42,000
—
—
—
QHCW
C
15–30
1
120/240
24, 48, 80
15a
—
65,000
—
5000
5000
2000
QHCW
C
15–30
2
120/240
24, 48, 80
15a
—
65,000
—
5000
5000
5000
QHCW
C
15–30
3
240
—
15b
—
—
65,000
—
—
—
QCGF
C, GF
15–30
1
120
—
—
10,000
—
—
—
—
—
QCGF
C, GF
15–50
2
120/240
—
—
10,000
10,000
—
—
—
—
QCHGF
C, GF
15–30
1
120
—
—
22,000
—
—
—
—
—
QCHGF
C, GF
15–30
2
120/240
—
—
22,000
22,000
—
—
—
—
QCGFEP
C, GFEP
15–30
1
120
—
—
10,000
—
—
—
—
—
15
QCGFEP
C, GFEP
15–30
2
120/240
—
—
10,000
10,000
—
—
—
—
QCHGFEP
C, GFEP
15–30
1
120
—
—
22,000
—
—
—
—
—
16
QCHGFEP
C, GFEP
15–30
2
120/240
—
—
22,000
22,000
—
—
—
—
17
Notes
1 Two-pole DC interrupting rating based on two poles connected in series.
Circuit breaker type codes: P Plug-in; B Bolt-on; C Cable-in/Cable-out; GF Ground Fault, 5 mA; GFEP Ground Fault, 30 mA.
11
12
13
14
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T3-8
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
CHB Circuit Breaker
CHB Mounting Bases
Originally a
Cutler-Hammer Product
Description
The CHB breaker continues
to be available as a
replacement breaker for
use in Cutler-Hammer
Type PB panelboards.
15–50A
When combined with the
mounting base, CHB
breakers were also used for
surface and DIN rail mount
cable-in/cable-out applications.
(See photo below.)
For “new” cable-in/
cable-out applications,
Eaton recommends the
use of our most current
product offering:
●
●
●
QUICKLAG Type QC
breakers (1.00-inch
per pole)
QCR breakers—rear
mount (0.50-inch per pole)
QCF breakers—front
mount (0.50-inch per pole)
3
Catalog Number
1
Single-pole
CHB9L1
2
15–50A
Two-pole
CHB9L250
15–50A
Three-pole
CHB9L350
3
25–50A
Single-pole
CHB9H1
4
25–125A
Two-pole
CHB9H2125
25–100A
Three-pole
CHB9H3100
Low Ampere
High Ampere
5
6
CHB Circuit Breaker Catalog Numbering System
CHB 3 100
Bolt-on
Circuit Breaker
Poles
1-, 2- or 3-
Ampere
Rating
7
8
Accessories
ST
SW
HID
HM
GF
EPD
H2
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Shunt-trip (requires extra pole space)
Switched neutral application
High intensity discharge lighting applications
High magnetic trip
Ground fault personnel protection
Ground fault equipment protection
22,000 AIC (40, 50, 60A obsolete)
9
10
11
Replacement Capabilities
QCR and QCF breakers
provide a 50% space savings
over 1.00-inch per pole
designs of the same rating.
12
13
14
15
Single-Pole
QUICKLAG Type QC Cable-In/
Cable-out Breaker—1.00 Inch per Pole
Single-Pole
Two-Pole
Type QCF Cable-In/Cable-Out Breaker
—0.50 Inch per Pole (Front-Connected)
Single-Pole
Two-Pole
Type QCR Cable-In/Cable-Out Breaker
—0.50 Inch per Pole (Rear-Connected)
16
17
18
19
CHB Breaker Mounting Base
20
21
22
23
24
25
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
V12-T3-9
3
1
2
3
4
5
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Series C Molded-Case Circuit Breaker Replacement Guide
Series C Industrial Circuit Breakers—Dimensions in Inches (Per Three-Pole Breaker)
Maximum Amperes
Description
100A
8
9
10
11
12
13
225A
100A
100A
EG
GD
ED, EDH, EDC
EHD
FDB, FD, HFD, FDC
Width: 3.00
Height: 4.88
Depth: 2.94
Width: 3.00
Height: 4.88
Depth: 2.81
Width: 4.13
Height: 6.00
Depth: 3.38
Width: 4.13
Height: 6.00
Depth: 3.38
Width: 4.13
Height: 6.00
Depth: 3.38
EB 1
No previous circuit
breaker existed
EHB 1
FB 1, HFB
Width: 4.13
Height: 6.00
Depth: 3.38
Width: 4.13
Height: 6.00
Depth: 3.38
FA, HFA
Series C circuit breakers are the current GHC
offering and, as such, are a logical first
choice when upgrading or retrofitting
equipment. All circuit breakers listed
in a column are ELECTRICALLY
INTERCHANGEABLE.
6
7
100A/125A
Current Design
Replacement Circuit Breakers
These new UL labeled circuit breakers
continue to be manufactured and are
primarily applied to achieve exact
physical and electrical replacement of
previously installed Cutler-Hammer/
Westinghouse circuit breakers of the
same style number and rating.
Width: 4.13
Height: 6.00
Depth: 3.38
Out-of-Production Westinghouse Circuit Breakers
These circuit breakers are no
longer manufactured. *Indicates the
last date of manufacture. As an option,
any of these circuit breakers can be
reconditioned at the original factory.
For details, see Page V12-T3-5, or
contact your local Eaton Field
Sales office.
E, EA
QCC
EH
*1974
* 1968
* 1974
* 1974
Width: 4.13
Height: 6.00
Depth: 3.38
Width: 4.50
Height: 7.00
Depth: 3.38
Width: 4.13
Height: 6.50
Depth: 3.38
Width: 4.13
Height: 6.50
Depth: 3.38
CA, CAH, HCA 1
F, HF
G
1974
1965
Width: 4.13
Height: 9.38
Depth: 4.06
Width: 8.25
Height: 9.38
Depth: 4.06
14
15
Width: 4.13
Height: 6.50
Depth: 2.69
16
17
Out-of-Production Cutler-Hammer Circuit Breakers Last Manufactured by Eaton in 1994
FS
EC, EHC
FS, FH,
FC, HFC
Width: 4.13
Height: 6.13
Depth: 3.38
Width: 4.13
Height: 6.13
Depth: 3.19
18
19
20
FL
21
22
Width: 4.13
Height: 9.31
Depth: 3.19
23
24
Note
1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.
25
V12-T3-10
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
3
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Series C Industrial Circuit Breakers—Dimensions in Inches (Per Three-Pole Breaker), Continued
1
Maximum Amperes
150A
225A, 250A
400A
600A
2
Current Design
FDB, FD, HFD, FDC
JG
JD, HJD, JDC
250A
JDB
250A
DK 1
KD, HKD, KDC 1
KDB
LG
LD, HLD, LDB
3
4
5
Width: 4.13
Height: 6.00
Depth: 3.38
Width: 4.13
Height: 10.00
Depth: 4.06
Width: 4.13
Height: 10.00
Depth: 4.06
Width: 5.50
Height: 10.13
Depth: 4.06
Width: 5.50
Height: 10.13
Depth: 4.06
Width: 5.50
Height: 10.13
Depth: 4.06
Width: 8.25
Height: 10.75
Depth: 4.06
KB 2, HKB 2
JB 2
DA 2
LB 2, HLB 1
LBB 2
LC 2, HLC
250A
250A
Width: 4.13
Height: 10.00
Depth: 4.06
Width: 4.13
Height: 10.00
Depth: 4.06
KA 2, HKA 2
JA 2
225A
225A
Width: 5.50
Height: 10.13
Depth: 4.06
Width: 5.50
Height: 10.13
Depth: 4.06
6
7
Replacement Circuit Breakers
FB 2, HFB
Width: 4.13
Height: 6.00
Depth: 3.38
8
Width: 5.50
Height: 10.13
Depth: 4.06
Width: 5.50
Height: 10.13
Depth: 4.06
Width: 5.50
Height: 10.13
Depth: 4.06
Width: 8.25
Height: 10.75
Depth: 4.06
LA 2, HLA
LAB 2
LA 2, HLA
9
10
11
Width: 8.25
Height: 10.75
Depth: 4.06
Width: 8.25
Height: 10.75
Depth: 4.06
12
Width: 8.25
Height: 10.75
Depth: 4.06
13
Out-of-Production Westinghouse Circuit Breakers
FA, HFA
JK
J
225A
JKL
L, LM, HLM
14
225A
*1974
Width: 4.13
Height: 6.50
Depth: 3.38
*Indicates the last
date of manufacture.
*1967
*1967
*1967
Width: 8.25
Height: 10.75
Depth: 4.06
Width: 8.25
Height: 10.13
Depth: 4.06
Width: 8.25
Height: 10.75
Depth: 4.06
K, HK
15
16
*1967
Width: 8.25
Height: 22.00
Depth: 5.50
KL, HKL
225A
17
SPCB 600A,
SCB 600A
*1986 (Consult Eaton)
*1967
*1967
Width: 8.25
Height: 15.50
Depth: 4.06
Width: 8.25
Height: 5.75
Depth: 4.06
Width: 8.25
Height: 10.75
Depth: 4.06
18
19
20
Out-of-Production Cutler-Hammer Circuit Breakers Last Manufactured by Eaton in 1994
FS, FH, FC, HFC
JS, JH, JL
JS
KS-D, KS
KS-D, KH-D, KS, KH
KS-D, KH-D, KS, KH
LS(E), LH(E), LS(A), LH(A)
21
22
Width: 4.25
Height: 6.13
Depth: 3.19
Width: 4.25
Height: 12.00
Depth: 3.81
Width: 4.25
Height: 12.00
Depth: 3.81
Width: 5.50
Height: 10.13
Depth: 3.81
Notes
1 When upgrading a HLB, LBB to a Series C K-Frame in a panelboard application, also order
TAD3 spacer kit.
Width: 5.50
Height: 10.13
Depth: 3.81
2
Width: 5.50
Height: 10.13
Depth: 3.81
23
Width: 8.25
Height: 10.75
Depth: 3.81
24
These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions see the cross-reference on
Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
V12-T3-11
25
3
1
2
3
4
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Series C Industrial Circuit Breakers—Dimensions in Inches (Per Three-Pole Breaker), Continued
Maximum Amperes
Description
1200A
1600A/2000A/2500A 1
NG
ND, HND, NDC
NG
ND, HND, NDC
RG
RD
Width: 8.25
Height: 16.00
Depth: 5.50
Width: 8.25
Height: 16.00
Depth: 5.50
Width: 15.50
Height: 16.00
Depth: 9.75
MA 2, HMA and MC 2, MCC 2
SELTRONIC™ 2
NC 2, HNC and NB 2, HNB
PC, PCC
PB
Width: 8.25
Height: 16.00
Depth: 4.06
Width: 8.25
Height: 16.00
Depth: 5.50
Width: 12.06
Height: 22.06
Depth: 9.06
Width: 12.06
Height: 22.06
Depth: 9.06
LM, HLM and M
MA, HMA
800A
Current Design
Series C circuit breakers are the
MDL, HMDL
current offering and, as such,
are a logical first choice when
upgrading or retrofitting equipment.
All circuit breakers listed in
a column are ELECTRICALLY
INTERCHANGEABLE.
5
6
7
8
9
10
Width: 8.25
Height: 16.00
Depth: 4.06
Replacement Circuit Breakers
These new UL labeled circuit
MA 2, HMA, MD 2, MDS 2
and MC 2
breakers continue to be
manufactured and are primarily
applied to achieve exact physical
and electrical replacement of
previously installed Cutler-Hammer/
Westinghouse circuit breakers of
the same style number and rating.
PB/PC breakers are not UL Listed.
11
12
13
14
15
Width: 8.25
Height: 16.00
Depth: 4.06
Out-of-Production Westinghouse Circuit Breakers
These circuit breakers are
LM, HLM and M
no longer manufactured.
*Indicates the last date of
manufacture. As an option, any
of these circuit breakers can be
reconditioned at the original factory.
For details, see Page V12-T3-5,
or contact your local Eaton Field
Sales office.
MA, HLM
PA
1200A
16
*1967
*1967
*1968
*1967
*1974
17
Width: 8.25
Height: 22.00
Depth: 5.50
Width: 8.25
Height: 22.00
Depth: 5.50
Width: 8.25
Height: 16.00
Depth: 5.50
Width: 8.25
Height: 22.00
Depth: 5.50
Width: 12.00
Height: 22.00
Depth: 9.06
18
19
SPCB 1200A,
SCB 1200A
*1986 (Consult Eaton)
Width: 8.25 Height: 16.00 Depth: 5.50
SPCB 2000–3000A,
SCB 2000–3000A
*1986 (Consult Eaton)
Width: 12.06 Height: 22.06 Depth: 9.06
Out-of-Production Cutler-Hammer Circuit Breakers Last Manufactured by Eaton in 1994
20
MS, MH
NS, NH
Width: 8.25
Height: 16.00
Depth: 4.06
Width: 8.25
Height: 16.00
Depth: 5.50
No equivalent Cutler-Hammer brand
frame size existed
No equivalent Cutler-Hammer brand frame
size existed
21
22
23
24
25
Notes
1 RD breaker replaces PC, PCC and PB breakers for 2000 and 2500A only.
V12-T3-12
2
These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on
Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
3
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Current Limiting Circuit Breakers—Dimensions in Inches (Per Three-Pole Breaker)
1
Maximum Amperes
Description
100A
250A
400A
100A
225A
FCL
Current Limit-R
(non-fused)
LCL
Current Limit-R
(non-fused)
LCL
Current Limit-R
(non-fused)
FB
TRI-PAC®
(fused)
LA
TRI-PAC
(fused)
2
Current Design
All circuit breakers listed in a
column are ELECTRICALLY
INTERCHANGEABLE.
3
4
5
6
Width: 4.13
Height: 8.75
Depth: 3.38
Width: 8.25
Height: 16.00
Depth: 4.06
Width: 8.25
Height: 16.00
Depth: 4.06
Width: 4.13
Height: 8.75
Depth: 3.50
7
Width: 8.25
Height: 16.00
Depth: 4.75
8
Replacement Circuit Breakers
9
These new UL labeled circuit breakers
continue to be manufactured and are
primarily applied to achieve exact
physical and electrical replacement of
previously installed Cutler-Hammer/
Westinghouse circuit breakers of the
same style number and rating.
10
11
Out-of-Production Westinghouse Circuit Breakers
These circuit breakers are no
longer manufactured.
*Indicates the last date of manufacture.
As an option, any of these circuit breakers
can be reconditioned at the original
factory. For details, see Page V12-T3-5,
or contact your local Eaton Field
Sales office.
FA
TRI-PAC
F
TRI-PAC
K
TRI-PAC
12
13
14
15
*1968
*1968
Width: 4.13
Height: 9.38
Depth: 3.19
Width: 4.63 Width: 8.25
Height: 11.81 Height: 19.63
Depth: 3.81
Depth: 4.06
*1968
16
17
Out-of-Production Cutler-Hammer Circuit Breakers Last Manufactured by Eaton in 1994
No Equivalent Cutler-Hammer Brand Frame Sizes Existed
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
V12-T3-13
3
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
1
Current Limiting Circuit Breakers—Dimensions in Inches (Per Three-Pole Breaker)
2
Description
3
All circuit breakers listed in a column are
ELECTRICALLY INTERCHANGEABLE.
Maximum Amperes
400A
800A
1600A
LA
TRI-PAC®
(Fused)
NB
TRI-PAC
(Fused)
PB
TRI-PAC
(Fused)
Width: 8.25
Height: 16.00
Depth: 4.75
Width: 8.25
Height: 22.00
Depth: 5.50
Width: 12.06
Height: 22.13
Depth: 9.06
L
TRI-PAC
MA
TRI-PAC
PA
TRI-PAC
*1968
*1968
*1968
*1968
Width: 8.25
Height: 19.63
Depth: 4.06
Width: 8.25
Height: 26.91
Depth: 5.50
Width: 8.25
Height: 22.00
Depth: 5.50
Width: 12.00
Height: 22.00
Depth: 9.06
Current Design
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Replacement Circuit Breakers
These new UL labeled circuit breakers continue to be
manufactured and are primarily applied to achieve exact
physical and electrical replacement of previously installed
Cutler-Hammer/Westinghouse circuit breakers of the same
style number and rating.
Out-of-Production Westinghouse Circuit Breakers
These circuit breakers are no longer manufactured.
KL
*Indicates the last date of manufacture. As an option, any
TRI-PAC
of these circuit breakers can be reconditioned at the original
factory. For details, see Page V12-T3-5, or contact your local
Eaton Field Sales office.
14
15
16
17
18
Out-of-Production Cutler-Hammer Circuit Breakers Last Manufactured by Eaton in 1994
No equivalent Cutler-Hammer brand frame sizes existed
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T3-14
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
3
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
■ Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1
Type EB Single-, Two-, Three-Pole; 240 Vac Maximum; Thermal-Magnetic and Saf-T-Vue® 2
EB: 120, 240 Vac;
125/250 Vdc
Two-Pole, 240 Vac, 125/250 Vdc 3
Three-Pole, 240 Vac, 125/250 Vdc 3
Standard
Standard
Standard
Saf-T-Vue 4
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
15
EB1015 5
EB2015
EB3015
EB3015S
20
EB1020 5
EB2020
EB3020
EB3020S
25
EB1025
EB2025
EB3025
EB3025S
30
EB1030
EB2030
EB3030
EB3030S
35
EB1035
EB2035
EB3035
EB3035S
40
EB1040
EB2040
EB3040
EB3040S
45
EB1045
EB2045
EB3045
EB3045S
50
EB1050
EB2050
EB3050
EB3050S
60
EB1060
EB2060
EB3060
EB3060S
70
EB1070
EB2070
EB3070
EB3070S
80
EB1080
EB2080
EB3080
EB3080S
90
EB1090
EB2090
EB3090
EB3090S
100
EB1100
EB2100
EB3100
EB3100S
Approximate shipping weight is 2 lbs
Approximate shipping weight is 3 lbs
Approximate shipping weight is 4.5 lbs
Continuous Ampere
Rating at 40°C
EHB: 277, 480 Vac;
250 Vdc
1
Single-Pole, 120 Vac, 125 Vdc 3
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Type EHB Single-, Two-, Three-Pole; 480 Vac Maximum; Thermal-Magnetic and Saf-T-Vue 2
Continuous Ampere
Rating at 40°C
Single-Pole, 277 Vac, 125 Vdc 3
Two-Pole, 480 Vac, 250 Vdc 3
Three-Pole, 480 Vac
Standard
Standard
Standard
Saf-T-Vue 4
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
15
EHB1015 6
EHB2015
EHB3015
EHB3015S
20
EHB1020 6
EHB2020
EHB3020
EHB3020S
25
EHB1025
EHB2025
EHB3025
EHB3025S
30
EHB1030
EHB2030
EHB3030
EHB3030S
35
EHB1035
EHB2035
EHB3035
EHB3035S
40
EHB1040
EHB2040
EHB3040
EHB3040S
45
EHB1045
EHB2045
EHB3045
EHB3045S
50
EHB1050
EHB2050
EHB3050
EHB3050S
60
EHB1060
EHB2060
EHB3060
EHB3060S
70
EHB1070
EHB2070
EHB3070
EHB3070S
80
EHB1080
EHB2080
EHB3080
EHB3080S
90
EHB1090
EHB2090
EHB3090
EHB3090S
100
EHB1100
EHB2100
EHB3100
EHB3100S
Approximate shipping weight is 2 lbs
Approximate shipping weight is 3 lbs
Approximate shipping weight is 4.5 lbs
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Amperes
18
120 and 240 AC
10,000 asymmetrical, symmetrical
19
125/250 DC
5000 3
UL Listed Interrupting Ratings 7
Maximum Volts
EB Breakers
20
EHB, FB Breakers
240 AC
20,000 asymmetrical, 18,000 symmetrical
277 AC (EHB)
15,000 asymmetrical, 14,000 symmetrical
480 AC
15,000 asymmetrical, 14,000 symmetrical
600 AC (FB)
15,000 asymmetrical, 14,000 symmetrical
250 DC
10,000 3
21
22
Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.
2 Includes load terminals only.
3 DC ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits.
4 Not UL Listed.
5 Switching duty rated for 120 Vac fluorescent light applications only.
6 Switching duty rated for 277 Vac fluorescent light applications only.
7 Interrupting capacities shown do not apply to molded-case switches.
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
23
24
25
V12-T3-15
3
1
2
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
■ Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1
Type FB, HFB Single-, Two-, Three-, Four-Pole; 480V Max.; Thermal-Magnetic MARK 75® Saf-T-Vue
FB, HFB: 600 Vac;
250 Vdc
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40°C
Single-Pole
277 Vac; 125 Vdc 2
Two-Pole
600 Vac; 250 Vdc 2
Four-Pole 34
600 Vac
Three-Pole
600 Vac
MARK 75 5
Standard
MARK 75 6
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
Catalog Number Catalog Number
15
HFB1015 8
FB2015
HFB2015
FB3015
FB3015S
HFB3015L
FB4015
20
HFB1020 8
FB2020
HFB2020
FB3020
FB3020S
HFB3020L
FB4020
25
HFB1025
FB2025
HFB2025
FB3025
FB3025S
HFB3025L
FB4025
30
HFB1030
FB2030
HFB2030
FB3030
FB3030S
HFB3030L
FB4030
35
HFB1035
FB2035
HFB2035
FB3035
FB3035S
HFB3035L
FB4035
40
HFB1040
FB2040
HFB2040
FB3040
FB3040S
HFB3040L
FB4040
45
HFB1045
FB2045
HFB2045
FB3045
FB3045S
HFB3045L
FB4045
50
HFB1050
FB2050
HFB2050
FB3050
FB3050S
HFB3050L
FB4050
7
60
HFB1060
FB2060
HFB2060
FB3060
FB3060S
HFB3060L
FB4060
70
HFB1070
FB2070
HFB2070
FB3070
FB3070S
HFB3070L
FB4070
8
80
HFB1080
FB2080
HFB2080
FB3080
FB3080S
HFB3080L
FB4080
90
HFB1090
FB2090
HFB2090
FB3090
FB3090S
HFB3090L
FB4090
100
HFB1100
FB2100
HFB2100
FB3100
FB3100S
HFB3100L
FB4100
110
—
—
—
FB3110
FB3110S
HFB3110
—
125
—
—
—
FB3125
FB3125S
HFB3125
—
150
—
—
—
FB3150
FB3150S
HFB3150
—
3
4
5
6
9
10
Standard
Saf-T-Vue 6
MARK 75 7
Standard
UL Listed Interrupting Ratings 9
11
Maximum Volts
Amperes
MARK 75 Type HFB
12
240 AC
13
14
75,000 asymmetrical, 65,000 symmetrical
277 AC 6
75,000 asymmetrical, 65,000 symmetrical
480 AC
30,000 asymmetrical, 25,000 symmetrical
250 DC (two-pole)
20,000 2j
Special Breakers Type FB, Magnetic Only, Front Adjustable
15
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
Two-Pole, 600 Vac
Three-Pole, 600 Vac
Magnetic
Trip Range
Amperes
Catalog/Style Number Catalog/Style Number Catalog/Style Number Catalog/Style Number
Catalog/Style Number
3
7–22
FB2022MRL
HFB2022ML
FB3022MRL
FB3022SMRL
HFB3022ML
5
15–45
FB2045MRL
HFB2045ML
FB3045MRL
FB3045SMRL
HFB3045ML
10
35–110
FB2110MRL
HFB2110ML
FB3110MRL
FB3110SMRL
HFB3110ML
25
32–80
2610D53G12
4994D96G12
2610D53G30
4998D89G30
2610D57G30
18
25
66–190
FB2190MRL
HFB2190ML
FB3190MRL
FB3190SMRL
HFB3190ML
30
50–150
1268C14G05
—
1268C14G06
—
—
19
30
90–270
FB2270MRL
HFB2270ML
FB3270MRL
FB3270SMRL
HFB3270ML
50
66–190
1268C14G01
—
1268C14G02
—
—
50
160–480
FB2480MRL
HFB2480ML
FB3480MRL
FB3480SMRL
HFB3480ML
70
100–270
2610D53G13
4994D96G13
2610D53G31
2610D58G31
4994D96G31
100
150–480
1268C14G03
—
1268C14G04
81E4647
65E4667
100
450–1550
FB21550MRL
HFB21550ML
FB31550MRL
FB31550SMRL
HFB31550ML
16
17
20
21
Standard
MARK 75
Standard
Saf-T-Vue
MARK 75 7
Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.
2 DC ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits.
3 Not UL Listed.
4 All four poles have thermal-magnetic trip elements. Can be supplied with three protected poles and one unprotected, non-automatic pole if required.
Order by description with no price or dimensional differences.
5 15–30A rated 75,000 AIC. 40–100A rated 30,000A asymmetrical, 25,000A symmetrical.
6 Two-pole breakers are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole.
7 Includes line and load terminals. MARK 75 frame color changed from gray to black in mid-2002.
8 Switching duty rated for 277 Vac fluorescent light applications only.
9 Interrupting capacities shown do not apply to molded-case switches.
j Ratings above 10,000A not UL Listed.
22
23
24
25
V12-T3-16
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
3
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
Accessories and Modifications
Terminals
Breakers include load
terminals only. Terminals are
UL Listed as suitable for wire
type and size. When used with
aluminum conductors, use
joint compound. When line
terminals are required, order
by style number from the table
at no charge with the breaker.
Note: Magnetic only breakers
include both line and
load terminals.
Note: Suffix “L” on catalog number
indicates line and load terminals
included. If factory installation is
required, specify on order.
Terminals
Maximum
Amperes
Wire
Type
Wire
Range
Package of Three Line Terminals 1
Style Number
Standard Pressure Type Terminals
20 (EB, EHB)
Al/Cu
#14–#10
624B100G14
100
Al/Cu
#14–1/0
624B100G02
150
Al/Cu
# 4–4/0
624B100G17
Al/Cu
#14–#4
624B100G10
100
Al/Cu
# 4–4/0
624B100G17
Terminal Style 624B100G02
Terminal Style 624B100G17
Collar
Collar
Nut
Clip
Conductor
Insert collar enclosing
conductor as shown. Locate
nut on top of conductor and
tighten securely with screw
and washer. Caution: Collar
must surround conductor.
Terminal Style 624B100G10
Conductor
LFB3070R 4
80–150
LFB3150R 5
Terminal Style 624B100G14
Collar
Conductor
Screw
Washer
Screw
Assemble collar on top
of conductor as shown.
Tighten securely with
screw and washer.
Conductor
Wire Clamp
Assemble wire clamp
to bottom of conductor
as shown.
For Magnetic Only Breakers 36
3
LFB3003MR
5
LFB3005MR
10
LFB3010MR
25
LFB3025MR
30
LFB3030MR
LFB3050MR
70
LFB3070MR
Federal Specification
Classifications
EB, EHB, FB and HFB
breakers meet requirements
of Federal Specification
W-C-375b as follows:
100
LFB3100MR
150
LFB3150MR
Notes
1 Style listed is for package of
three terminals.
2 These frames are obsolete. For
replacement solutions, see the crossreference on Pages V12-T3-114–
V12-T3-167.
3 Ratings through 70A can be supplied
with terminals for Cu cable only
(#14–#2). Order by description.
4 Superseded by LFD3070R.
5 Superseded by LFD3150R.
6 Replace with Series C HMCP and ELC
current limiters or replace with MCP
and EL current limiters
●
●
●
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
Note: Not UL Listed.
●
50
6
Available in all standard
ratings of EB, EHB, FB
and HFB breakers up to
ratings of 100A. Factory
adder 20%.
Limiter
Catalog Number
15–70
Note: Not UL Listed.
Ambient Compensating
Breakers
To order, add suffix letter
“A” to standard thermalmagnetic breaker
catalog number.
LFB Current Limiter
Attachment 2
Insert collar enclosing
conductor and center on
extrusion on collar. Install clip
with legs on top of conductor
and snap end around bottom
of collar.
1
Note: Not UL Listed.
For Thermal-Magnetic Breakers 3
Extrusion
Special Calibrations
Special calibration price
additions apply to ampere
ratings not listed as
standard or for ambients
other than 40°C or 50°C.
For frequencies other than
0–60 Hz AC, refer to Eaton.
See Application Data 29-160
for information regarding
special conditions.
Maximum calibration for
400 Hz is 135A.
50°C Calibration
Add suffix “V” to catalog
number for complete breaker,
listed above, when ordering
breakers to be used in 50°C
ambients.
Note: Cannot be used with
plug-in adapters. Ratings
through 70A can be supplied
with terminals for Cu cable only
(#14–#2). Order by description.
Breaker Rating,
Amperes
Washer
Screw
LFB Current Limiter Attachment
The LFB current limiter is
an attachment that bolts to
the load end of a standard
FB thermal-magnetic or
magnetic only breaker,
providing 200,000A
interrupting capacity (AIC) at
up to 600 Vac. Limiters for
thermal-magnetic breakers
are UL Listed. Current
limiters must be applied
as indicated in the table
on Page V12-T3-16.
Standard LFB terminals
are suitable for Cu/AI cable.
Ratings through 70A accept
(1) #14–#2, and 100 and
150A accept (1) #1–4/0.
Optional Al/Cu Pressure Terminals
50
■ Shaded area denotes
obsolete or discontinued
products and services.
EB: single-pole, Class 11a;
two-, three-pole, Classes
10b, 11b, 12b
EHB: single-pole,
Class 13a; two-,
three-pole, Class 13b
FB: two-, three-pole,
Class 18a
HFB: single-pole,
Class 13a; two-, three-pole,
Class 22a
For all three-phase
delta, grounded B phase
applications, contact
Avery Creek, NC,
Technical Resource Center
at 1-800-356-1243.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
V12-T3-17
3
1
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
Type CCV 120/240V Tenant Main Circuit Breaker
10,000A and 25,000A Interrupting Capacity, 100–225A
Interrupting Capacity
at 120/240 Vac
●
Type CCV—10,000A rms
symmetrical
●
Type CCVH—25,000A rms
symmetrical
2
3
4
Handles
●
Trip-free with “ONTRIPPED-OFF” positions.
Reset past “OFF” is
required to latch breaker
contacts after tripping
5
6
Type CCV Two-Pole
120/240V Tenant
Main Circuit Breaker
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Product Description
Terminals
●
Standard lugs (wire
connectors) suitable for
either CU or AL wire
Ratings
●
120/240 Vac, two-pole,
through 225 continuous
amperes, calibrated
at 40ºC
Standards
●
Complies with UL Standard
489, breakers are listed
under UL File #E781
Tripping Characteristics
●
Thermal-magnetic trip,
calibrated and sealed
after assembly. Indirectly
heated thermal tripping
bimetal elements
Backward Compatibility
●
CCV and CCVH retains
same profile and footprint
of the CC and CCH breaker
allowing use in the
same applications
Product Selection
Ampere
Rating
Two-Pole Breaker
Wire Size Range, Al/Cu
10,000 AIC
25,000 AIC
100
#2/0–300 kcmil
CCV2100
CCVH2100
125
#2/0–300 kcmil
CCV2125
CCVH2125
150
#2/0–300 kcmil
CCV2150
CCVH2150
16
175
#2/0–300 kcmil
CCV2175
CCVH2175
200
#2/0–300 kcmil
CCV2200
CCVH2200
17
225
#2/0–300 kcmil
CCV2225
CCVH2225
15
Terminal Options
Terminal configurations available by adding the following
designator on the suffix:
W = No terminals
X = Load side terminals only
Y = Line side terminals only
CCV as tenant main breaker with CC as aftermarket option.
Cross-Reference
CCV Catalog
Number
CC Catalog
Number
CCV Catalog
Number
CCV2100
CC2100
CCVH2100
CCH2100
CCV2100W
CC2100W
CCVH2100W
CCH2100W
CCV2100X
CC2100X
CCVH2100X
CCH2100X
CCV2100Y
CC2100Y
CCVH2100Y
CCH2100Y
CCV2125
CC2125
CCVH2125
CCH2125
CCV2125W
CC2125W
CCVH2125W
CCH2125W
CCV2125X
CC2125X
CCVH2125X
CCH2125X
CCV2125Y
CC2125Y
CCVH2125Y
CCH2125Y
CCV2150
CC2150
CCVH2150
CCH2150
CCV2150W
CC2150W
CCVH2150W
CCH2150W
CCV2150X
CC2150X
CCVH2150X
CCH2150X
CCV2150Y
CC2150Y
CCVH2150Y
CCH2150Y
CCV2175
CC2175
CCVH2175
CCH2175
CCV2175W
CC2175W
CCVH2175W
CCH2175W
CCV2175X
CC2175X
CCVH2175X
CCH2175X
CCV2175Y
CC2175Y
CCVH2175Y
CCH2175Y
CCV2200
CC2200
CCVH2200
CCH2200
CCV2200W
CC2200W
CCVH2200W
CCH2200W
CCV2200X
CC2200X
CCVH2200X
CCH2200X
CCV2200Y
CC2200Y
CCVH2200Y
CCH2200Y
CCV2225
CC2225
CCVH2225
CCH2225
CCV2225W
CC2225W
CCVH2225W
CCH2225W
CCV2225X
CC2225X
CCVH2225X
CCH2225X
CCV2225Y
CC2225Y
CCVH2225Y
CCH2225Y
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T3-18
CC Catalog
Number
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
3
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
Type JB
1
■ Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1
Type JB 90–250A, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc, Two- and Three-Pole, Fixed Trip, Thermal-Magnetic, Saf-T-Vue
JB: 600 Vac; 250 Vdc
(Suitable for Reverse-Feed)
Continuous Ampere
Rating at 40°C
Complete Breaker Includes
Pressure Type Aluminum Terminals 2
2
Magnetic Trip Setting,
Amperes (Set on High Side,
Adjustable to Lower Limits)
Standard
Saf-T-Vue 3
Standard
Saf-T-Vue 3
Low
High
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
Two-Pole, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc
Breaker Without Terminals
4
70
350
700
JB2070
JB2070S
JB2070W
JB2070SW
90
450
900
JB2090
JB2090S
JB2090W
JB2090SW
100
500
1000
JB2100
JB2100S
JB2100W
JB2100SW
125
625
1250
JB2125
JB2125S
JB2125W
JB2125SW
150
750
1500
JB2150
JB2150S
JB2150W
JB2150SW
175
875
1750
JB2175
JB2175S
JB2175W
JB2175SW
200
1000
2000
JB2200
JB2200S
JB2200W
JB2200SW
225
1125
2250
JB2225
JB2225S
JB2225W
JB2225SW
250
1250
2500
JB2250
JB2250S
JB2250W
JB2250SW
Approx. shipping weight. 12 lbs
Approx. shipping weight 12 lbs
70
350
700
JB3070
JB3070S
JB3070W
JB3070SW
90
450
900
JB3090
JB3090S
JB3090W
JB3090SW
100
500
1000
JB3100
JB3100S
JB3100W
JB3100SW
125
625
1250
JB3125
JB3125S
JB3125W
JB3125SW
150
750
1500
JB3150
JB3150S
JB3150W
JB3150SW
175
875
1750
JB3175
JB3175S
JB3175W
JB3175SW
200
1000
2000
JB3200
JB3200S
JB3200W
JB3200SW
225
1125
2250
JB3225
JB3225S
JB3225W
JB3225SW
250
1250
2500
JB3250
JB3250S
JB3250W
JB3250SW
Approx. shipping weight 12 lbs
5
6
7
8
10
11
12
13
14
15
Magnetic Only Breakers, Front Adjustable 3
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C
4
9
Three-Pole, 600 Vac Only
Approx. shipping weight 14 lbs
3
Breaker Only, No Terminals 5
Magnetic Trip Setting,
Amperes (Set on High Side,
Adjustable to Lower Limits)
Two-Pole 4
Standard
Saf-T-Vue
Standard
Saf-T-Vue
16
Three-Pole
Low
High
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
250
350
700
JB2700MW
JB2700SMW
JB3700MW
JB3700SMW
250
625
1250
JB21250MW
JB21250SMW
JB31250MW
JB31250SMW
250
750
1500
JB21500MW
JB21500SMW
JB31500MW
JB31500SMW
250
875
1750
JB21750MW
JB21750SMW
JB31750MW
JB31750SMW
250
1125
2250
JB22250MW
JB22250SMW
JB32250MW
JB32250SMW
250
1250
2500
JB22500MW
JB22500SMW
JB32500MW
JB32500SMW
Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.
2 Terminals are shipped separately from breaker frame.
3 Not UL Listed.
4 Two-pole breakers are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole.
5 Select desired terminal from table and order as separate item.
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
V12-T3-19
3
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
1
UL Listed Interrupting Ratings 1
Accessories and Modifications
Maximum Volts
Amperes
■
2
240 AC
30,000 asymmetrical, 25,000 symmetrical
480 AC
25,000 asymmetrical, 22,000 symmetrical
3
600 AC
15,000 asymmetrical, 14,000 symmetrical
250 DC
10,000
4
5
Terminals
Maximum
Amperes
Catalog
Number
Standard Al/Cu Pressure Terminals
6
250
7
250
8
Number of Cables,
Wire Range, Type
(1) #4–350 kcmil Al/Cu
TA250KB
Optional Pressure Terminals
(1) #4–350 kcmil Cu
Note
1 Ratings above 10,000A not UL Listed.
9
10
T250KB
Shaded area denotes
obsolete or discontinued
products and services.
Special Calibrations
Special calibration price
additions apply to ampere
ratings not listed as
standard or for ambients
other than 40°C or 50°C.
For frequencies other than
0–60 Hz AC, refer to Eaton.
Note: Not UL Listed.
50°C Calibration
Add suffix “V” to catalog
number for complete
breaker when ordering
breakers to be used in 50°C
ambients. Same price as
standard 40°C breakers.
For CSA®, see
Page V12-T3-48.
Type JB breakers meet
requirements of Class 19a
circuit breakers as defined
by Federal Specification
W-C-375b.
11
12
Note: Not UL Listed.
UL Listed Interrupting
Rating (see table)
For all three-phase
delta, grounded B phase
applications, contact
Avery Creek, NC, Technical
Resource Center at
1-800-356-1243.
Terminals (see table)
Two terminals are required
per pole.
Terminals are UL Listed for
wire type and range listed left.
When used with aluminum
conductors, use joint
compound. To order optional
copper only terminals, add
suffix “C” to complete
breaker catalog number.
Note: Terminals are shipped
separately from breaker frame.
Magnetic Only Breakers
For description, refer to
Application Data 29-160.
Additional Accessories
and Modifications
Refer to Pages V12-T3-65–
V12-T3-79.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T3-20
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
3
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
Types KB and HKB
■
Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1
Type KB and MARK 75 Type HKB 90–250A, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc, Two- and Three-Pole, Interchangeable Trip
KB/MARK 75/HKB:
Thermal-Magnetic, Saf-T-Vue
600 Vac; 250 Vdc
Magnetic Trip
Setting Amperes 3
Continuous
Ampere
Rating at 40°C
Low
High
Shipped as Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals 2
Complete Breaker Includes
Pressure Type Aluminum Terminals 3
Frame Only
Trip Unit Only
Standard
Catalog
Number
Saf-T-Vue 3
Catalog
Number
MARK 75
Catalog
Number
Standard
Catalog
Number
Saf-T-Vue 4
Catalog
Number
MARK 75
Catalog
Number
Standard
Saf-T-Vue
MARK 75
Catalog
Number
2
3
4
5
Two-Pole, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc 3
70
350
700
KB2070
KB2070S
HKB2070
KB2250F
KB2250FS
HKB2250F
HKB2070T
90
450
900
KB2090
KB2090S
HKB2090
KB2250F
KB2250FS
HKB2250F
HKB2090T
100
500
1000
KB2100
KB2100S
HKB2100
KB2250F
KB2250FS
HKB2250F
HKB2100T
125
625
1250
KB2125
KB2125S
HKB2125
KB2250F
KB2250FS
HKB2250F
HKB2125T
150
750
1500
KB2150
KB2150S
HKB2150
KB2250F
KB2250FS
HKB2250F
HKB2150T
175
875
1750
KB2175
KB2175S
HKB2175
KB2250F
KB2250FS
HKB2250F
HKB2175T
200
1000
2000
KB2200
KB2200S
HKB2200
KB2250F
KB2250FS
HKB2250F
HKB2200T
225
1125
2250
KB2225
KB2225S
HKB2225
KB2250F
KB2250FS
HKB2250
HKB2225T
250
1250
2500
KB2250
KB2250S
HKB2250
KB2250F
KB2250FS
HKB2250F
HKB2250T
Approx. shipping weight 12 lbs
Approx. shipping weight 9 lbs
700
KB3070
KB3070S
HKB3070
KB3250F
KB3250FS
HKB3250F
HKB3070T
450
900
KB3090
KB3090S
HKB3090
KB3250F
KB3250FS
HKB3250F
HKB3090T
100
500
1000
KB3100
KB3100S
HKB3100
KB3250F
KB3250FS
HKB3250F
HKB3100T
125
625
1250
KB3125
KB3125S
HKB3125
KB3250F
KB3250FS
HKB3250F
HKB3125T
150
750
1500
KB3150
KB3150S
HKB3150
KB3250F
KB3250FS
HKB3250F
HKB3150T
175
875
1750
KB3175
KB3175S
HKB3175
KB3250F
KB3250FS
HKB3250F
HKB3175T
200
1000
2000
KB3200
KB3200S
HKB3200
KB3250F
KB3250FS
HKB3250F
HKB3200T
225
1125
2250
KB3225
KB3225S
HKB3225
KB3250F
KB3250FS
HKB3250F
HKB3225T
250
1250
2500
KB3250
KB3250S
HKB3250
KB3250F
KB3250FS
HKB3250F
HKB3250T
Approx. shipping
weight 2 lbs
Magnetic Only, Front Adjustable Breakers 4
Two-Pole 4
Three-Pole
Low
High
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
250
350
700
HKB2700TM
HKB3700TM
250
500
1000
HKB21000TM
HKB31000TM
250
625
1250
HKB21250TM
HKB31250TM
250
750
1500
HKB21500TM
HKB31500TM
250
875
1750
HKB21750TM
HKB31750TM
250
1125
2250
HKB22250TM
HKB32250TM
250
1250
2500
HKB22500TM
HKB32500TM
9
12
13
14
15
16
17
Trip Units Only
Magnetic Trip Setting Amperes 5
8
11
350
90
Approx. shipping weight 11 lbs
7
10
70
Approx. shipping weight 14 lbs
6
Approx. shipping
weight 2 lbs
Three-Pole, 600 Vac Only
Continuous
Ampere Rating
1
18
19
20
21
22
Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.
2 Terminals shipped separately from breaker frame.
3 Not UL Listed.
4 Two-pole breakers are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole.
5 Set on high side, adjustable to lower limit.
23
24
25
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
V12-T3-21
3
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
1
UL Listed Interrupting Ratings
Accessories and Modifications
Maximum Volts
■
2
Standard Breakers
240 AC
30,000 asymmetrical, 25,000 symmetrical
3
480 AC
25,000 asymmetrical, 22,000 symmetrical
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Shaded area denotes
obsolete or discontinued
products and services.
Amperes
600 AC
15,000 asymmetrical, 14,000 symmetrical
250 DC
10,000
MARK 75 Breakers
240 AC
75,000 asymmetrical., 65,000 symmetrical.
480 AC
30,000 asymmetrical, 25,000 symmetrical
600 AC
20,000 asymmetrical, 18,000 symmetrical
250 DC
20,000 1
Terminals 2
Maximum
Amperes
Number of Cables,
Wire Range, Type
Catalog
Number
Standard Al/Cu Pressure Terminals
250
(1) #4–350 kcmil Al/Cu
TA250KB
Optional Pressure Terminals
250
(1) #4–350 kcmil Cu
Notes
1 Ratings above 10,000A not UL Listed.
2 Terminals shipped separately from breaker frame.
12
T250KB
Magnetic Only, Front Adjustable
Breakers (see table on
Page V12-T3-21)
Special Calibrations
Special calibration price
additions apply to ampere
ratings not listed as standard
or for ambients other than
40°C or 50°C. For frequencies
other than 0–60 Hz AC, refer
to Eaton.
Note: Two-pole breakers are
supplied in three-pole frames
with current carrying parts
omitted from center pole.
50°C Calibration
Add suffix “V” to catalog
number for complete
breaker, listed on
Page V12-T3-21, when
ordering breakers to be
used in 50°C ambients.
For CSA, see
Page V12-T3-48.
13
UL Listed Interrupting Ratings
(see table)
For all three-phase
delta, grounded B phase
applications, contact
Avery Creek, NC, Technical
Resource Center at
1-800-356-1243.
Terminals (see table)
Two terminals are required
per pole.
Terminals are UL Listed for
wire type and range listed
below. When used with
aluminum conductors, use
joint compound. To order
optional copper only terminals,
add suffix “C” to complete
breaker catalog number.
Magnetic Only Breakers
For description, refer to
Application Data 29-160. To
order these breakers, select
frame, trip unit and terminals.
Additional Accessories
and Modifications
Refer to Pages V12-T3-65–
V12-T3-79.
Note: Two-pole breakers are
supplied in three-pole frames
with current carrying parts
omitted from center pole.
14
Type KB breakers meet
requirements for Class 19a,
as defined by Federal
Specification W-C-375b.
Type HKB breakers not
defined in W-C-375b.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T3-22
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
3
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
Type JA
1
■
Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1
Type JA 70–225A, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc, Two- and Three-Pole, Fixed Trip, Thermal-Magnetic, Saf-T-Vue
JA: 600 Vac; 250 Vdc
(Suitable for Reverse-Feed)
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C
2
Magnetic Trip Setting,
Amperes (Set on High Side,
Adjustable to Lower Limits)
Complete Breaker Includes
Pressure Type Aluminum Terminals 2
Breaker Without Terminals
Standard
Saf-T-Vue
Standard
Saf-T-Vue
Low
High
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
3
Two-Pole, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc 3
70
350
700
JA2070
JA2070S
JA2070W
JA2070SW
90
450
900
JA2090
JA2090S
JA2090W
JA2090SW
100
500
1000
JA2100
JA2100S
JA2100W
JA2100SW
125
625
1250
JA2125
JA2125S
JA2125W
JA2125SW
150
750
1500
JA2150
JA2150S
JA2150W
JA2150SW
175
875
1750
JA2175
JA2175S
JA2175W
JA2175SW
200
1000
2000
JA2200
JA2200S
JA2200W
JA2200SW
225
1125
2250
JA2225
JA2225S
JA2225W
JA2225SW
Approx. shipping weight 12 lbs
Approx. shipping weight 12 lbs
Three-Pole, 600 Vac Only
70
350
700
JA3070
JA3070S
JA3070W
JA3070SW
90
450
900
JA3090
JA3090S
JA3090W
JA3090SW
100
500
1000
JA3100
JA3100S
JA3100W
JA3100SW
125
625
1250
JA3125
JA3125S
JA3125W
JA3125SW
150
750
1500
JA3150
JA3150S
JA3150W
JA3150SW
175
875
1750
JA3175
JA3175S
JA3175W
JA3175SW
200
1000
2000
JA3200
JA3200S
JA3200W
JA3200SW
225
1125
2250
JA3225
JA3225S
JA3225W
JA3225SW
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Approx. shipping weight 14 lbs
Approx. shipping weight 12 lbs
Magnetic Trip Setting, Amperes (Set on
High Side, Adjustable to Lower Limits)
Two-Pole 4
Three-Pole
Standard
Saf-T-Vue
Standard
Saf-T-Vue
Low
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
15
16
14
Special Breakers 4
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C
4
High
Magnetic Only Breakers, Front Adjustable—Without Terminals 5
225
350
700
JA2700MW
JA2700SMW
JA3700MW
JA3700SMW
225
625
1250
JA21250MW
JA21250SMW
JA31250MW
JA31250SMW
225
750
1500
JA21500MW
JA21500SMW
JA31500MW
JA31500SMW
225
875
1750
JA21750MW
JA21750SMW
JA31750MW
JA31750SMW
225
1125
2250
JA22250MW
JA22250SMW
JA32250MW
JA32250SMW
18
19
Ambient Compensating Breakers
70
350
700
JA2070A
—
JA3070A
—
100
500
1000
JA2100A
—
JA3100A
—
125
625
1250
JA2125A
—
JA3125A
—
150
750
1500
JA2150A
—
JA3150A
—
175
875
1750
JA2175A
—
JA3175A
—
200
1000
2000
JA2200A
—
JA3200A
—
225
1125
2250
JA2225A
—
JA3225A
—
17
20
21
22
Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.
2 Terminals are shipped separately from breaker frame.
3 Not UL Listed.
4 Two-pole breakers are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole.
5 Select desired terminal from table and order as separate item.
23
24
25
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
V12-T3-23
3
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
1
UL Listed Interrupting Ratings
Accessories and Modifications
Maximum Volts
Amperes
■
2
240 AC
30,000 asymmetrical, 25,000 symmetrical
480 AC
25,000 asymmetrical, 22,000 symmetrical
3
600 AC
25,000 asymmetrical, 22,000 symmetrical
250 DC
10,000
4
Terminals
Maximum
Amperes
Number of Cables,
Wire Range, Type
5
Standard Al/Cu Pressure Terminals
6
Optional Copper Pressure Terminals
7
8
70–225
(1) #6–350 kcmil Cu, or (1) #4–350 kcmil Al
70–225
70–225
1
Note
1 Optional terminal.
9
10
Catalog
Number
TA225LA1
(1) #6–350 kcmil Cu
T225LA
(1) #6–250 kcmil Cu
T225LBF
Shaded area denotes
obsolete or discontinued
products and services.
Special Calibrations (see table
on Page V12-T3-23)
Special calibration price
additions apply to ampere
ratings not listed as
standard or for ambients
other than 40°C or 50°C.
For frequencies other than
0–60 Hz AC, refer to Eaton.
See Application Data 29-160
for information regarding
special conditions.
Note: Not UL Listed.
50°C Calibration
Add suffix “V” to catalog
number for complete
breaker when ordering
breakers to be used in
50°C ambients.
11
For CSA, see
Page V12-T3-48.
12
Type JA breakers meet
requirements of Class 19a
and 20a circuit breakers
as defined by Federal
Specification W-C-375b.
13
Terminals (see table)
Two terminals are required
per pole.
Terminals are UL Listed for
wire type and range listed left.
When used with aluminum
conductors, use joint
compound. To order optional
copper only terminals, add
suffix “C” to complete
breaker catalog number.
Note: Terminals are shipped
separately from breaker frame.
Note: If upgrading a JA breaker
to a Series C K-Frame in a
panelboard application, order
TAD3 spacer kit.
UL Listed Interrupting Ratings
(see table)
Magnetic Only and Ambient
Compensating Breakers
For description, refer to
Application Data 29-160.
To order, select catalog
number from table on
Page V12-T3-23.
For all three-phase
delta, grounded B phase
applications, contact Avery
Creek, NC, Technical
Resource Center at
1-800-356-1243.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T3-24
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
3
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
Types KA and HKA
1
■
Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1
Type KA 70–225A, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc, Two- and Three-Pole, Interchangeable Trip, Thermal-Magnetic,
KA: 600 Vac; 250 Vdc
Saf-T-Vue and MARK 75 Type HKA
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40°C
Magnetic
Trip Setting
Amperes 2
Low
High
Complete Breaker
Shipped as Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals
Includes Pressure Type Aluminum Terminals 3
Frame Only
Standard
Catalog
Number
2
Trip Unit Only
Saf-T-Vue
Catalog
Number
MARK 75
Catalog
Number
Standard
Catalog
Number
Saf-T-Vue
Catalog
Number
MARK 75
Catalog
Number
Standard MARK 75
or Saf-T-Vue
Catalog
Number
Two-Pole, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc 4
70
350
700
KA2070
KA2070S
HKA2070
KA2225F
KA2225FS
HKA2225F
HKA2070T
90
450
900
KA2090
KA2090S
HKA2090
KA2225F
KA2225FS
HKA2225F
HKA2090T
100
500
1000
KA2100
KA2100S
HKA2100
KA2225F
KA2225FS
HKA2225F
HKA2100T
125
625
1250
KA2125
KA2125S
HKA2125
KA2225F
KA2225FS
HKA2225F
HKA2125T
150
750
1500
KA2150
KA2150S
HKA2150
KA2225F
KA2225FS
HKA2225F
HKA2150T
175
875
1750
KA2175
KA2175S
HKA2175
KA2225F
KA2225FS
HKA2225F
HKA2175T
200
1000
2000
KA2200
KA2200S
HKA2200
KA2225F
KA2225FS
HKA2225F
HKA2200T
225
1125
2250
KA2225
KA2225S
HKA2225
KA2225F
KA2225FS
HKA2225F
HKA2225T
Approx. shipping weight 12 lbs
3
4
5
6
7
8
Approx. shipping weight 9.5 lbs
Approx. shipping weight 2 lbs
9
Three-Pole, 600 Vac Only
70
350
700
KA3070
KA3070S
HKA3070
KA3225F
KA3225FS
HKA3225F
HKA3070T
90
450
900
KA3090
KA3090S
HKA3090
KA3225F
KA3225FS
HKA3225F
HKA3090T
100
500
1000
KA3100
KA3100S
HKA3100
KA3225F
KA3225FS
HKA3225F
HKA3100T
125
625
1250
KA3125
KA3125S
HKA3125
KA3225F
KA3225FS
HKA3225F
HKA3125T
150
750
1500
KA3150
KA3150S
HKA3150
KA3225F
KA3225FS
HKA3225F
HKA3150T
175
875
1750
KA3175
KA3175S
HKA3175
KA3225F
KA3225FS
HKA3225F
HKA3175T
200
1000
2000
KA3200
KA3200S
HKA3200
KA3225F
KA3225FS
HKA3225F
HKA3200T
225
1125
2250
KA3225
KA3225S
HKA3225
KA3225F
KA3225FS
HKA3225F
HKA3225T
Approx. shipping weight 14 lbs
Approx. shipping weight 11 lbs
10
11
12
13
Approx. shipping weight 2.5 lb.
Trip Units Only for Magnetic Only and Ambient Compensating Breakers 5
Continuous
Ampere Rating
Magnetic Trip Setting, Amperes 2
Low
15
Two-Pole 4
Three-Pole
High
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
Magnetic Only, Front Adjustable Breakers
225
350
700
HKA2700TM
HKA3700TM
225
625
1250
HKA21250TM
HKA31250TM
225
750
1500
HKA21500TM
HKA31500TM
225
875
1750
HKA21750TM
HKA31750TM
225
1125
2250
HKA22250TM
HKA32250TM
350
700
HKA2070TA
HKA3070TA
100
500
1000
HKA2100TA
HKA3100TA
125
625
1250
HKA2125TA
HKA3125TA
150
750
1500
HKA2150TA
HKA3150TA
175
875
1750
HKA2175TA
HKA3175TA
200
1000
2000
HKA2200TA
HKA3200TA
225
1125
2250
HKA2225TA
HKA3225TA
17
18
20
21
22
23
Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.
2 Set on high side, adjustable to lower limit.
3 Terminals are shipped separately from breaker frame.
4 Two-pole breakers are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole.
5 Not UL Listed.
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
16
19
Ambient Compensating Breakers
70
14
24
25
V12-T3-25
3
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
1
UL Listed Interrupting Ratings
Accessories and Modifications
Maximum Volts
■
2
Standard Breakers
240 AC
30,000 asymmetrical, 25,000 symmetrical
3
480 AC
25,000 asymmetrical, 22,000 symmetrical
600 AC
25,000 asymmetrical, 22,000 symmetrical
250 DC
10,000
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Shaded area denotes
obsolete or discontinued
products and services.
Amperes
MARK 75 Breakers
240 AC
75,000 asymmetrical, 65,000 symmetrical
480 AC
40,000 asymmetrical, 35,000 symmetrical
600 AC
30,000 asymmetrical, 25,000 symmetrical
250 DC
20,000 1
Terminals
Maximum
Amperes
Note: Not UL Listed.
Number of Cables,
Wire Range, Type
Catalog
Numbers
Standard Al/Cu Pressure Terminals
225
Special Calibrations
Special calibration price
additions apply to ampere
ratings not listed as
standard or for ambients
other than 40°C or 50°C.
For frequencies other than
0–60 Hz AC, refer to Eaton.
See Application Data 29-160
for information regarding
special conditions.
(1) #6–350 kcmil Cu, or
(1) #4–350 kcmil Al
TA225LA1
50°C Calibration
Add suffix “V” to catalog
number for complete breaker
when ordering breakers to be
used in 50°C ambients.
Optional Copper Pressure Terminals
225
(1) #6–350 kcmil Cu
T225LA
225 2
(1) #6–250 kcmil Cu
T225LBF
Notes
1 Ratings above 10,000A not UL Listed.
2 Optional terminal.
13
Note: Not UL Listed.
Terminals (see table)
Two terminals are required
per pole.
Terminals are UL Listed for
wire type and range listed
below. When used with
aluminum conductors, use
joint compound. To order
optional copper only terminals,
add suffix “C” to complete
breaker catalog number.
Type KA breakers meet
requirements for Class 19a
and 20a circuit breakers, and
Type HKA meet requirements
for Class 23a as defined
by Federal Specification
W-C-375b.
For all three-phase
delta, grounded B phase
applications, contact Avery
Creek, NC, Technical
Resource Center at
1-800-356-1243.
Note: Terminals are shipped
separately from breaker frame.
Note: If upgrading a KA, HKA
breaker to a Series C K-Frame in a
panelboard application, also order
TAD3 spacer kit.
UL Listed Interrupting Ratings
(see table)
Magnetic Only Breakers
For description, refer to
Application Data 29-160. To
order these breakers, select
frame, trip unit and terminals.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T3-26
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
3
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
Type LBB
■
Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1
Type LBB 125–400A, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc, Two- and Three-Pole, Fixed Trip, Thermal-Magnetic, Saf-T-Vue
LBB: 600 Vac; 250 Vdc
(Suitable for Reverse-Feed)
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C
Magnetic Trip Setting,
Amperes 2
Low
Complete Breaker Includes Pressure Type
Aluminum Terminals 3
Breaker Without Terminals
Saf-T-Vue
Standard
Saf-T-Vue
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
Two-Pole, 600 Vdc, 250 Vdc 4
125
625
1250
LBB2125
LBB2125S
LBB2125W
LBB2125SW
150
750
1500
LBB2150
LBB2150S
LBB2150W
LBB2150SW
175
875
1750
LBB2175
LBB2175S
LBB2175W
LBB2175SW
200
1000
2000
LBB2200
LBB2200S
LBB2200W
LBB2200SW
225
1125
2250
LBB2225
LBB2225S
LBB2225W
LBB2225SW
250
1250
2500
LBB2250
LBB2250S
LBB2250W
LBB2250SW
300
1500
3000
LBB2300
LBB2300S
LBB2300W
LBB2300SW
350
1750
3500
LBB2350
LBB2350S
LBB2350W
LBB2350SW
400
2000
4000
LBB2400
LBB2400S
LBB2400W
LBB2400SW
Approx. shipping weight 13 lbs
4
5
6
7
8
9
Three-Pole, 600 Vac Only
125
625
1250
LBB3125
LBB3125S
LBB3125W
LBB3125SW
150
750
1500
LBB3150
LBB3150S
LBB3150W
LBB3150SW
175
875
1750
LBB3175
LBB3175S
LBB3175W
LBB3175SW
200
1000
2000
LBB3200
LBB3200S
LBB3200W
LBB3200SW
225
1125
2250
LBB3225
LBB3225S
LBB3225W
LBB3225SW
250
1250
2500
LBB3250
LBB3250S
LBB3250W
LBB3250SW
300
1500
3000
LBB3300
LBB3300S
LBB3300W
LBB3300SW
350
1750
3500
LBB3350
LBB3350S
LBB3350W
LBB3350SW
400
2000
4000
LBB3400
LBB3400S
LBB3400W
LBB3400SW
Approx. shipping weight 15 lbs
2
3
Standard
High
Approx. shipping weight 13 lbs
1
Approx. shipping weight 15 lbs
Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.
2 Set on high side, adjustable to lower limits.
3 Terminals are shipped separately from breaker.
4 Two-pole breakers or trips are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
V12-T3-27
3
1
2
3
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
■
Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1
Magnetic Only, Ambient Compensating Breakers 2
Two-Pole Breakers 4
Continuous
Ampere Rating
Three-Pole Breakers
Magnetic Trip Setting, Amperes 3
Standard
Saf-T-Vue
Standard
Saf-T-Vue
Low
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
High
Magnetic Only Breakers, Front Adjustable—Without Terminals 5
400
350
700
LBB2700MW
LBB2700SMW
LBB3700MW
LBB3700SMW
4
400
625
1250
LBB21250MW
LBB21250SMW
LBB31250MW
LBB31250SMW
400
750
1500
LBB21500MW
LBB21500SMW
LBB31500MW
LBB31500SMW
5
400
875
1750
LBB21750MW
LBB21750SMW
LBB31750MW
LBB31750SMW
400
1125
2250
LBB22250MW
LBB22250SMW
LBB32250MW
LBB32250SMW
6
400
1500
3000
LBB23000MW
LBB23000SMW
LBB33000MW
LBB33000SMW
400
2000
4000
LBB24000MW
LBB24000SMW
LBB34000MW
LBB34000SMW
7
Ambient Compensating Breakers—Includes Terminals
125
625
1250
LBB2125A
LBB2125SA
LBB3125A
LBB3125SA
8
150
750
1500
LBB2150A
LBB2150SA
LBB3150A
LBB3150SA
175
875
1750
LBB2175A
LBB2175SA
LBB3175A
LBB3175SA
9
200
1000
2000
LBB2200A
LBB2200SA
LBB3200A
LBB3200SA
225
1125
2250
LBB2225A
LBB2225SA
LBB3225A
LBB3225SA
10
250
1250
2500
LBB2250A
LBB2250SA
LBB3250A
LBB3250SA
300
1500
3000
LBB2300A
LBB2300SA
LBB3300A
LBB3300SA
350
1750
3500
LBB2350A
LBB2350SA
LBB3350A
LBB3350SA
400
2000
4000
LBB2400A
LBB2400SA
LBB3400A
LBB3400SA
11
12
UL Listed
Interrupting Ratings
Accessories and
Modifications
13
Maximum
Volts
■
14
15
16
Amperes
240 AC
50,000 asymmetrical,
42,000 symmetrical
480 AC
35,000 asymmetrical,
30,000 symmetrical
600 AC
25,000 asymmetrical,
22,000 symmetrical
250 DC
20,000 6
17
18
19
Shaded area denotes
obsolete or discontinued
products and services.
Special Calibrations
Special calibration price
additions apply to ampere
ratings not listed as
standard or for ambients
other than 40°C or 50°C.
For frequencies other than
0–60 Hz AC, refer to Eaton.
See Application Data 29-160
for information regarding
special conditions.
Maximum calibration for
400 Hz is 300A.
Note: Not UL Listed.
20
50°C Calibration
Add suffix “V” to catalog
number for complete
breaker when ordering
breakers to be used in
50°C ambients.
21
22
Terminals
Two terminals required
per pole.
Select from Page V12-T3-35.
Note: Terminals are shipped
separately from breaker.
Note: If upgrading an LBB
breaker to a Series C K-Frame in a
panelboard application, also order
TAD3 spacer kit.
For CSA, see
Page V12-T3-48.
Type LBB breakers meet
requirements for Class 21a
circuit breakers, as defined
by Federal Specification
W-C-375b.
UL Listed Interrupting Ratings
(see table)
For all three-phase
delta, grounded B phase
applications, contact Avery
Creek, NC, Technical
Resource Center at
1-800-356-1243.
Magnetic Only Breakers
For description, refer to
Application Data 29-160.
To order, select catalog
number from table above.
Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For
replacement solutions, see the crossreference on Pages V12-T3-114–
V12-T3-167.
2 Not UL Listed.
3 Set on high side, adjustable to
lower limits.
4 Two-pole breakers or trips are supplied
in three-pole frames with current
carrying parts omitted from center pole.
5 Select desired terminals from
V12-T3-30, and order as separate item.
6 Ratings above 10,000A not UL Listed.
Note: Not UL Listed.
23
24
25
V12-T3-28
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
3
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
Types LB and HLB
■
Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1
Type LB and MARK 75 Type HLB 70–400A, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc, Two- and Three-Pole, Interchangeable Trip,
LB: 600 Vac; 250 Vdc
Thermal-Magnetic, Saf-T-Vue and MARK 75
Shipped as Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals 3
Complete Breaker
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40°C
1
2
Magnetic Trip Setting
Amperes 2
Includes Pressure Type
Aluminum Terminals 3
Trip Unit Only
3
Low
Standard
Catalog
Number
Saf-T-Vue
Catalog
Number
MARK 75
Catalog
Number
Standard
Catalog
Number
Saf-T-Vue
Catalog
Number
MARK 75
Catalog
Number
Standard Saf-T-Vue,
MARK 75
Catalog Number
4
5
Two-Pole, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc
High
Frame Only
4
70
350
700
LB2070
LB2070S
—
LB2400F
LB2400FS
HLB2400F
HLB2070T
90
450
900
LB2090
LB2090S
—
LB2400F
LB2400FS
HLB2400F
HLB2090T
100
500
1000
LB2100
LB2100S
—
LB2400F
LB2400FS
HLB2400F
HLB2100T
125
625
1250
LB2125
LB2125S
HLB2125
LB2400F
LB2400FS
HLB2400F
HLB2125T
150
750
1500
LB2150
LB2150S
HLB2150
LB2400F
LB2400FS
HLB2400F
HLB2150T
175
875
1750
LB2175
LB2175S
HLB2175
LB2400F
LB2400FS
HLB2400F
HLB2175T
200
1000
2000
LB2200
LB2200S
HLB2200
LB2400F
LB2400FS
HLB2400F
HLB2200T
225
1125
2250
LB2225
LB2225S
HLB2225
LB2400F
LB2400FS
HLB2400F
HLB2225T
250
1250
2500
LB2250
LB2250S
HLB2250
LB2400F
LB2400FS
HLB2400F
HLB2250T
300
1500
3000
LB2300
LB2300S
HLB2300
LB2400F
LB2400FS
HLB2400F
HLB2300T
350
1750
3500
LB2350
LB2350S
HLB2350
LB2400F
LB2400FS
HLB2400F
HLB2350T
400
2000
4000
LB2400
LB2400S
HLB2400
LB2400F
LB2400FS
HLB2400F
HLB2400T
6
7
8
9
10
Approx. shipping weight 13 lbs
Approx. shipping weight 10 lbs
Approx. shipping
weight 2 lbs
11
12
Three-Pole, 600 Vac Only
70
350
700
LB3070
LB3070S
—
LB3400F
LB3400FS
HLB3400F
HLB3070T
90
450
900
LB3090
LB3090S
—
LB3400F
LB3400FS
HLB3400F
HLB3090T
100
500
1000
LB3100
LB3100S
—
LB3400F
LB3400FS
HLB3400F
HLB3100T
125
625
1250
LB3125
LB3125S
HLB3125
LB3400F
LB3400FS
HLB3400F
HLB3125T
150
750
1500
LB3150
LB3150S
HLB3150
LB3400F
LB3400FS
HLB3400F
HLB3150T
175
875
1750
LB3175
LB3175S
HLB3175
LB3400F
LB3400FS
HLB3400F
HLB3175T
200
1000
2000
LB3200
LB3200S
HLB3200
LB3400F
LB3400FS
HLB3400F
HLB3200T
225
1125
2250
LB3225
LB3225S
HLB3225
LB3400F
LB3400FS
HLB3400F
HLB3225T
250
1250
2500
LB3250
LB3250S
HLB3250
LB3400F
LB3400FS
HLB3400F
HLB3250T
300
1500
3000
LB3300
LB3300S
HLB3300
LB3400F
LB3400FS
HLB3400F
HLB3300T
350
1750
3500
LB3350
LB3350S
HLB3350
LB3400F
LB3400FS
HLB3400F
HLB3350T
400
2000
4000
LB3400
LB3400S
HLB3400
LB3400F
LB3400FS
HLB3400F
HLB3400T
Approx. shipping weight 15 lbs
Approx. shipping weight 12 lbs
13
14
15
16
17
Approx. shipping
weight 2.5 lbs
18
19
Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-126–V12-T3-167.
2 Set on high side, adjustable to lower limits.
3 Terminals are shipped separately from breaker.
4 Two-pole breakers or trips are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole.
20
21
22
23
24
25
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
V12-T3-29
3
1
2
3
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
■
Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products
and services. 1
Special Breakers—Trip Units Only 2
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
UL Listed
Interrupting Ratings
Maximum
Volts
Amperes
Magnetic Trip Setting,
Amperes 3
Trip Unit Only
Two-Pole 4
Three-Pole
Standard Breakers
Low
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
240 AC
50,000 asymmetrical,
42,000 symmetrical
480 AC
35,000 asymmetrical,
30,000 symmetrical
600 AC
25,000 asymmetrical,
22,000 symmetrical
20,000 5
High
Magnetic Only Breakers, Front Adjustable
4
400
350
700
HLB2700TM
HLB3700TM
400
625
1250
HLB21250TM
HLB31250TM
5
400
750
1500
HLB21500TM
HLB31500TM
400
875
1750
HLB21750TM
HLB31750TM
250 DC
6
400
1125
2250
HLB22250TM
HLB32250TM
MARK 75 Breakers
400
1125
2250
HLB22250TM
HLB32250TM
240 AC
75,000 asymmetrical,
65,000 symmetrical
7
400
1500
3000
HLB23000TM
HLB33000TM
480 AC
400
2000
4000
HLB24000TM
HLB34000TM
40,000 asymmetrical,
35,000 symmetrical
600 AC
30,000 asymmetrical,
25,000 symmetrical
250 DC
20,000 5
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Ambient Compensating Breakers
For all three-phase
delta, grounded B phase
applications, contact Avery
Creek, NC, Technical
Resource Center at
1-800-356-1243.
Terminals
Two terminals are required
per pole.
Terminals are UL Listed for
wire type and range listed
below. When used with
aluminum cable, use joint
compound. To order optional
copper only terminals, add
suffix “C” to complete
breaker catalog number.
Note: Terminals are shipped
separately from breaker. If
upgrading an LB, HLB breaker
to a Series C K-Frame in a
panelboard application, also
order TAD3 spacer kit.
70
350
700
HLB2070TA
HLB3070TA
90
450
900
HLB2090TA
HLB3090TA
100
500
1000
HLB2100TA
HLB3100TA
125
625
1250
HLB2125TA
HLB3125TA
150
750
1500
HLB2150TA
HLB3150TA
Terminals
175
875
1750
HLB2175TA
HLB3175TA
200
1000
2000
HLB2200TA
HLB3200TA
Maximum
Amperes
225
1125
2250
HLB2225TA
HLB3225TA
Standard Pressure Terminals
250
1250
2500
HLB2250TA
HLB3250TA
225
(1) #6–350 kcmil Cu, or (1) #4–350 kcmil Al
TA225LA1
HLB3300TA
350
(1) 250–500 kcmil Al/Cu
TA350DA
HLB3350TA
400
(2) 3/0–250 kcmil Cu only
T400DA2
HLB3400TA
Optional Copper Pressure Terminals
300
350
400
1500
3000
1750
3500
2000
4000
HLB2300TA
HLB2350TA
HLB2400TA
225
Accessories and
Modifications
■
Shaded area denotes
obsolete or discontinued
products and services.
Special Calibrations
Special calibration price
additions apply to ampere
ratings not listed as standard
or for ambients other
than 40°C or 50°C. For
frequencies other than
0–60 Hz AC circuits, refer
to Eaton. See Application
Data 29-160 for information
regarding special conditions.
Maximum calibration for
400 Hz is 300A.
Note: Not UL Listed.
23
50°C Calibration
Add suffix “V” to catalog
number for complete breaker
or trip unit only, when
ordering breakers to be
used in 50°C ambients.
Note: Not UL Listed.
Magnetic Only Breakers
For description, refer to
Application Data 29-160.
To order, select trip unit
from table above, frame
and terminals.
225
350
6
Number of Cables,
Wire Range, Type
(1) #6–350 kcmil Cu
T225LA
(1) #6–250 kcmil Cu
T225LBF
(1) 250–500 kcmil Cu
T350DA
Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on
Pages V12-T3-126–V12-T3-167.
2 Not UL Listed.
3 Set on high side, adjustable to lower limits.
4 Two-pole breakers or trips are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts
omitted from center pole.
5 Ratings above 10,000A not UL Listed.
6 Optional terminal.
Note: Not UL Listed.
For CSA, see
Page V12-T3-48.
Type LB breakers meet
requirements for Class 21a
circuit breakers, and Type HLB
meet requirements for Class
23a, as defined by Federal
Specification W-C-375b.
24
25
V12-T3-30
Catalog
Number
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
3
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
Type DA
1
■
Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1
Type DA Breakers 250–400A, 240 Vac, 250 Vdc, Two- and Three-Pole, Fixed Trip, Thermal-Magnetic
DA: 240 Vac; 250 Vdc
(Suitable for Reverse-Feed)
Breakers With Line and Load Terminals
Two-Pole 2
Catalog Number
Three-Pole
Catalog Number
Two-Pole 2
Catalog Number
Three-Pole
Catalog Number
3
250
DA2250Y
DA3250Y
DA2250
DA3250
300
DA2300Y
DA3300Y
DA2300
DA3300
4
350
DA2350Y
DA3350Y
DA2350
DA3350
400
DA2400Y
DA3400Y
DA2400
DA3400
Approx. shipping weight 13 lbs
Approx. shipping weight 15 lbs
Approx. shipping weight 13 lbs
Approx. shipping weight 13 lbs
Accessories and
Modifications
■
Shaded area denotes
obsolete or discontinued
products and services
Type DA breakers meet
requirements of Federal
Specification W-C-375b.,
Class 14b.
UL Listed
Interrupting Ratings
Maximum
Volts
240 AC
250 DC
2
Breakers With Line Terminals Only
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C
Terminals
Terminals are UL Listed for
the wire type and size listed
below. When used with
aluminum conductors,
use joint compound.
Terminals
Number
of Cables,
Maximum Wire Range,
Amperes Type
Catalog
Number
Standard Pressure Terminals
Amperes
350
(1) 250–500 kcmil TA350DA
Al/Cu
25,000 asymmetrical, 22,000
symmetrical
400
(2) 3/0–250 kcmil
Cu only
10,000
For all three-phase
delta, grounded B phase
applications, contact
Avery Creek, NC, Technical
Resource Center at
1-800-356-1243.
T400DA2
Optional Terminals
(for Copper Cable)
350
(1) 250–500 kcmil T350DA
Cu
Note: If upgrading a DA breaker
to a Series C K-Frame in a
panelboard application, also
order TAD3 spacer kit.
For CSA, see
Page V12-T3-48.
Special Calibrations
Special calibration price
additions apply to ampere
ratings not listed as standard
or for ambients other
than 40°C or 50°C. For
frequencies other than
0–60 Hz AC circuits, refer
to Eaton. See Application
Data 29-160 for information
regarding special conditions.
Maximum 400 Hz
calibrations: Type DA, 300A.
5
Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For
replacement solutions, see the crossreference on Pages V12-T3-114–
V12-T3-167.
2 Two-pole breakers are supplied in
three-pole frames.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Note: Not UL Listed.
13
50°C Calibration
Add suffix “V” to catalog
number for complete
breaker when ordering
breakers to be used in 50°C
ambients. Same price as
standard 40°C breakers.
14
15
16
Note: Not UL Listed.
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
V12-T3-31
3
1
2
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
Type LAB
■
Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1
Type LAB 125–400A, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc, Two- and Three-Pole, Fixed Trip, Thermal-Magnetic, Saf-T-Vue
LAB: 600 Vac; 250 Vdc
(Suitable for Reverse-Feed)
3
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C
4
Complete Breaker Includes Pressure Type
Aluminum Terminals 3
Breaker Without Terminals
Magnetic Trip Setting, Amperes 2
Standard
Saf-T-Vue
Standard
Saf-T-Vue
Low
High
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
Two-Pole, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc 4
125
625
1250
LAB2125
LAB2125S
LAB2125W
LAB2125SW
150
750
1500
LAB2150
LAB2150S
LAB2150W
LAB2150SW
175
875
1750
LAB2175
LAB2175S
LAB2175W
LAB2175SW
200
1000
2000
LAB2200
LAB2200S
LAB2200W
LAB2200SW
225
1125
2250
LAB2225
LAB2225S
LAB2225W
LAB2225SW
7
250
1250
2500
LAB2250
LAB2250S
LAB2250W
LAB2250SW
300
1500
3000
LAB2300
LAB2300S
LAB2300W
LAB2300SW
8
350
1750
3500
LAB2350
LAB2350S
LAB2350W
LAB2350SW
400
2000
4000
LAB2400
LAB2400S
LAB2400W
LAB2400SW
5
6
9
Approx. shipping weight 22 lbs
Approx. shipping weight 22 lbs
Three-Pole, 600 Vac Only
10
125
625
1250
LAB3125
LAB3125S
LAB3125W
LAB3125SW
150
750
1500
LAB3150
LAB3150S
LAB3150W
LAB3150SW
11
175
875
1750
LAB3175
LAB3175S
LAB3175W
LAB3175SW
200
1000
2000
LAB3200
LAB3200S
LAB3200W
LAB3200SW
12
225
1125
2250
LAB3225
LAB3225S
LAB3225W
LAB3225SW
250
1250
2500
LAB3250
LAB3250S
LAB3250W
LAB3250SW
13
300
1500
3000
LAB3300
LAB3300S
LAB3300W
LAB3300SW
350
1750
3500
LAB3350
LAB3350S
LAB3350W
LAB3350SW
14
400
2000
4000
LAB3400
LAB3400S
LAB3400W
LAB3400SW
Approx. shipping weight 24.5 lbs
Approx. shipping weight 24.5 lbs
Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.
2 Set on high side, adjustable to lower limits.
3 Terminals shipped separately from breaker.
4 Two-pole breakers or trips are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T3-32
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
3
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
■ Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1
Special Breakers 2
1
Breaker Catalog Number
Two-Pole 4
Continuous
Ampere Rating
Magnetic Trip Setting,
Low
Amperes 3
High
Magnetic Only Breakers, Front Adjustable—Without
2
Three-Pole
Standard
Saf-T-Vue
Standard
Saf-T-Vue
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
3
4
Terminals 5
400
350
700
LAB2700MW
LAB2700SMW
LAB3700MW
LAB3700SMW
400
625
1250
LAB21250MW
LAB21250SMW
LAB31250MW
LAB31250SMW
400
750
1500
LAB21500MW
LAB21500SMW
LAB31500MW
LAB31500SMW
400
875
1750
LAB21750MW
LAB21750SMW
LAB31750MW
LAB31750SMW
400
1125
2250
LAB22250MW
LAB22250SMW
LAB32250MW
LAB32250SMW
400
1500
3000
LAB23000MW
LAB23000SMW
LAB33000MW
LAB33000SMW
400
2000
4000
LAB24000MW
LAB24000SMW
LAB34000MW
LAB34000SMW
7
8
5
6
Ambient Compensating Breakers—Includes Terminals
125
625
1250
LAB2125A
—
LAB3125A
—
150
750
1500
LAB2150A
—
LAB3150A
—
175
875
1750
LAB2175A
—
LAB3175A
—
200
1000
2000
LAB2200A
—
LAB3200A
—
225
1125
2250
LAB2225A
—
LAB3225A
—
250
1250
2500
LAB2250A
—
LAB3250A
—
300
1500
3000
LAB2300A
—
LAB3300A
—
350
1750
3500
LAB2350A
—
LAB3350A
—
400
2000
4000
LAB2400A
—
LAB3400A
—
Accessories and
Modifications
■
Shaded area denotes
obsolete or discontinued
products and services.
Special Calibrations
Special calibration price
additions apply to ampere
ratings not listed as
standard or for ambients
other than 40°C or 50°C.
For frequencies other than
0–60 Hz AC circuits, refer
to Eaton. See Application
Data 29-160 for information
regarding special conditions.
Maximum calibration for
400 Hz is 300A.
Note: Not UL Listed.
50°C Calibration
Add suffix “V” to catalog
number for complete
breaker when ordering
breakers to be used in 50°C
ambients. For CSA, see
Page V12-T3-48.
Type LAB breakers meet
requirements for Class 21a
circuit breakers, as defined
by Federal Specification
W-C-375b.
Terminals
Two terminals required
per pole.
UL Listed
Interrupting Ratings 6
Note: Terminals shipped
separately from breaker.
Maximum
Volts
Amperes
240 AC
50,000 asymmetrical,
42,000 symmetrical
480 AC
35,000 asymmetrical,
30,000 symmetrical
600 AC
25,000 asymmetrical,
22,000 symmetrical
250 DC
20,000 7
Select from the table on
Page V12-T3-36.
Magnetic Only and Ambient
Compensating Breakers
To order, select catalog
number from “Special
Breakers” table above.
Additional Accessories and
Modifications
Refer to Pages V12-T3-65–
V12-T3-79.
9
10
11
Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For
replacement solutions, see the crossreference on Pages V12-T3-114–
V12-T3-167.
2 Not UL Listed.
3 Set on high side, adjustable to
lower limits.
4 Two-pole breakers or trips are supplied in
three-pole frames with current carrying
parts omitted from center pole.
5 Select desired terminals from
Page V12-T3-39 and order as
separate item.
6 Interrupting capacities shown do not
apply to molded-case switches.
7 Ratings above 10,000A not UL Listed.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
For all three-phase
delta, grounded B phase
applications, contact
Avery Creek, NC, Technical
Resource Center at
1-800-356-1243.
20
21
22
23
Note: Not UL Listed.
24
25
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
V12-T3-33
3
1
2
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
Types LA and HLA
■
Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1
Type LA and MARK 75 Type HLA 70–400A, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc, Two- and Three-Pole, Interchangeable Trip
LA: 600 Vac; 250 Vdc
3
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40°C
4
Magnetic
Trip Setting
Amperes 2
Low
400A Frame Breakers
6
High
Complete Breaker
Shipped as Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals
Includes Pressure Type Aluminum Terminals 3
Frame Only
Standard
Catalog
Number
MARK 75
Catalog
Number
Standard
Catalog
Number
4—Two-Pole,
Saf-T-Vue
Catalog
Number
Saf-T-Vue
Catalog
Number
MARK 75
Catalog
Number
Trip Unit Only
Standard,
MARK 75,
Saf-T-Vue
Catalog Number
600 Vac, 250 Vdc 5
5
70
350
700
LA2070
LA2070S
HLA2070
LA2400F
LA2400FS
HLA2400F
HLA2070T
90 6
450
900
LA2090
LA2090S
HLA2090
LA2400F
LA2400FS
HLA2400F
HLA2090T
6
100 6
500
1000
LA2100
LA2100S
HLA2100
LA2400F
LA2400FS
HLA2400F
HLA2100T
125
625
1250
LA2125
LA2125S
HLA2125
LA2400F
LA2400FS
HLA2400F
HLA2125T
7
150
750
1500
LA2150
LA2150S
HLA2150
LA2400F
LA2400FS
HLA2400F
HLA2150T
175
875
1750
LA2175
LA2175S
HLA2175
LA2400F
LA2400FS
HLA2400F
HLA2175T
200
1000
2000
LA2200
LA2200S
HLA2200
LA2400F
LA2400FS
HLA2400F
HLA2200T
225
1125
2250
LA2225
LA2225S
HLA2225
LA2400F
LA2400FS
HLA2400F
HLA2225T
250
1250
2500
LA2250
LA2250S
HLA2250
LA2400F
LA2400FS
HLA2400F
HLA2250T
300
1500
3000
LA2300
LA2300S
HLA2300
LA2400F
LA2400FS
HLA2400F
HLA2300T
350
1750
3500
LA2350
LA2350S
HLA2350
LA2400F
LA2400FS
HLA2400F
HLA2350T
400
2000
4000
LA2400
LA2400S
HLA2400
LA2400F
LA2400FS
HLA2400F
HLA2400T
8
9
10
Approx. shipping weight 21.75 lbs
11
Approx. shipping weight 17.5 lbs
Approx.shipping
weight 2.25 lbs
Three-Pole, 600 Vac Only
12
70 6
350
700
LA3070
LA3070S
HLA3070
LA3400F
LA3400FS
HLA3400F
HLA3070T
6
450
900
LA3090
LA3090S
HLA3090
LA3400F
LA3400FS
HLA3400F
HLA3090T
13
100 6
500
1000
LA3100
LA3100S
HLA3100
LA3400F
LA3400FS
HLA3400F
HLA3100T
125
625
1250
LA3125
LA3125S
HLA3125
LA3400F
LA3400FS
HLA3400F
HLA3125T
14
150
750
1500
LA3150
LA3150S
HLA3150
LA3400F
LA3400FS
HLA3400F
HLA3150T
175
875
1750
LA3175
LA3175S
HLA3175
LA3400F
LA3400FS
HLA3400F
HLA3175T
15
200
1000
2000
LA3200
LA3200S
HLA3200
LA3400F
LA3400FS
HLA3400F
HLA3200T
225
1125
2250
LA3225
LA3225S
HLA3225
LA3400F
LA3400FS
HLA3400F
HLA3225T
250
1250
2500
LA3250
LA3250S
HLA3250
LA3400F
LA3400FS
HLA3400F
HLA3250T
300
1500
3000
LA3300
LA3300S
HLA3300
LA3400F
LA3400FS
HLA3400F
HLA3300T
350
1750
3500
LA3350
LA3350S
HLA3350
LA3400F
LA3400FS
HLA3400F
HLA3350T
400
2000
4000
LA3400
LA3400S
HLA3400
LA3400F
LA3400FS
HLA3400F
HLA3400T
90
16
17
Approx. shipping weight 24.5 lbs
18
Approx. shipping weight 19 lbs
Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.
2 Set on high side, adjustable to lower limits.
3 Terminals shipped separately from breaker.
4 Terminals, trip units and accessories are not interchangeable between 400 and 600A frames.
5 Two-pole breakers or trips are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole.
6 These ratings have interrupting capacities reduced to 25,000A symmetrical at 240V, 20,000A symmetrical at 480V, and 15,000A symmetrical at 600V.
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T3-34
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
Approx. shipping
weight 3 lbs
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
■
Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services.
Special Breakers 2—Trip Units Only
Continuous
Ampere Rating
Magnetic Trip Setting, Amperes 3
Low
High
3
1
1
Two-Pole 4
Three-Pole
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
2
3
Magnetic Only Breakers, Front Adjustable—400A Frame Breakers 5
400
350
700
HLA2700TM
HLA3700TM
400
625
1250
HLA21250TM
HLA31250TM
400
750
1500
HLA21500TM
HLA31500TM
400
875
1750
HLA21750TM
HLA31750TM
400
1125
2250
HLA22250TM
HLA32250TM
400
1500
3000
HLA23000TM
HLA33000TM
400
2000
4000
HLA24000TM
HLA34000TM
6
7
4
5
Ambient Compensating Breakers—400A Frame Breakers Only 5
70 6
350
700
HLA2070TA
HLA3070TA
6
450
900
HLA2090TA
HLA3090TA
100 6
500
1000
HLA2100TA
HLA3100TA
125
625
1250
HLA2125TA
HLA3125TA
150
750
1500
HLA2150TA
HLA3150TA
175
875
1750
HLA2175TA
HLA3175TA
200
1000
2000
HLA2200TA
HLA3200TA
225
1125
2250
HLA2225TA
HLA3225TA
250
1250
2500
HLA2250TA
HLA3250TA
300
1500
3000
HLA2300TA
HLA3300TA
350
1750
3500
HLA2350TA
HLA3350TA
400
2000
4000
HLA2400TA
HLA3400TA
90
8
9
10
11
12
Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.
2 Not UL Listed.
3 Set on high side, adjustable to lower limits.
4 Two-pole breakers or trips are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole.
5 Terminals, trip units and accessories are not interchangeable between 400 and 600A frames.
6 These ratings have interrupting capacities reduced to 25,000A symmetrical at 240V, 20,000A symmetrical at 480V, and 15,000A symmetrical at 600V.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
V12-T3-35
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
Accessories and
Modifications
■
Shaded area denotes
obsolete or discontinued
products and services.
Special Calibrations
Special calibration price
additions apply to ampere
ratings not listed as standard
or for ambients other
than 40°C or 50°C. For
frequencies other than
0–60 Hz AC, refer to Eaton.
See Application Data 29-160
for information regarding
special conditions. Maximum
400 Hz calibration: 400A
frame, 300A.
Note: Not UL Listed.
50°C Calibration
Add suffix “V” to catalog
number for complete breaker
or trip unit only, when
ordering breakers to be
used in 50°C ambients.
Note: Not UL Listed.
Terminals
Two terminals required
per pole.
Select from table at right.
Note: Terminals shipped
separately from breaker.
15
16
Magnetic Only Breakers
To order, select trip unit from
the table on Page V12-T3-35,
frame and terminals from
table at right.
Note: Not UL Listed. MARK 75
frame color changed from gray
to black in mid-2002.
UL Listed Except as Noted
Type LA breakers meet
requirements for Class 21a
circuit breakers, and Type
HLA meet requirements
for Class 23a as defined
by Federal Specification
W-C-375b.
Terminals
Two terminals are required
per pole.
copper only terminals, add
suffix “C” to complete
breaker catalog number.
Terminals are UL Listed for
wire type and range listed
below. When used with
aluminum cable, use joint
compound. To order optional
Note: Terminals shipped
separately from breaker.
Terminals, trip units and
accessories are not
interchangeable between
400 and 600A frames.
Terminals
Maximum
Amperes
Number of Cables,
Wire Range, Type
Standard Al/Cu Pressure Terminals
225 3
(1) #6–350 kcmil Cu, or (1) #4–350 kcmil Al
TA225LA1
400 3
(1) #4–250 kcmil Al/Cu, plus (1) 3/0–600 kcmil Al/Cu
TA400LA1
Optional Copper Pressure Terminals
UL Listed
Interrupting Ratings 1
225 3
(1) #6–350 kcmil Cu
T225LA
225 34
(1) #6–250 kcmil Cu
T225LBF
Maximum
Volts
400 3
(1) #4–250 kcmil Cu, plus (1) 3/0–600 kcmil Cu
T401LA
Amperes
Standard Breakers
240 AC
50,000 asymmetrical,
42,000 symmetrical
480 AC
35,000 asymmetrical,
30,000 symmetrical
600 AC
25,000 asymmetrical,
22,000 symmetrical
250 DC
20,000 2
Notes
1 Interrupting capacities do not apply to molded-case switches.
2 Ratings above 10,000A not UL Listed.
3 400A frame only.
4 Optional terminal.
MARK 75 Breakers
240 AC
75,000 asymmetrical,
65,000 symmetrical
480 AC
40,000 asymmetrical,
35,000 symmetrical
600 AC
30,000 asymmetrical,
25,000 symmetrical
250 DC
20,000 2
For all three-phase
delta, grounded B phase
applications, contact
Avery Creek, NC, Technical
Resource Center at
1-800-356-1243.
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T3-36
Catalog
Number
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
3
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
Types LA and HLA
■
Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1
Type LA and MARK 75 Type HLA 250–600A, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc, Two-, Three-Pole, Interchangeable Trip
LA: 600 Vac; 250 Vdc
Thermal-Magnetic, Saf-T-Vue and MARK 75 Breakers
Magnetic Trip
Setting, Amperes 2
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40°C
Low
High
Shipped as Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals 3
Complete Breaker
Includes Pressure Type Aluminum Terminals 3
Frame Only
Standard
Catalog
Number
MARK 75
Catalog
Number
Standard
Catalog
Number
Saf-T-Vue
Catalog
Number
MARK 75
Catalog
Number
Standard Saf-T-Vue,
MARK 75
Catalog
Number
Saf-T-Vue
Catalog
Number
Trip Unit Only
600A Frame Breakers 4—Two-Pole, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc 5
1
2
3
4
5
250
1250
2500
2603D50G01
2603D50G13
1256C10G02
LA2600F
LA2600FS
HLA2600F
2603D46G07
300
1500
3000
2603D50G02
2603D50G14
1256C10G03
LA2600F
LA2600FS
HLA2600F
2603D46G08
350
1750
3500
2603D50G03
2603D50G15
1256C10G04
LA2600F
LA2600FS
HLA2600F
2603D46G09
350
1750
3500
2603D50G03
2603D50G15
1256C10G04
LA2600F
LA2600FS
HLA2600F
2603D46G09
400
2000
4000
2603D50G04
2603D50G16
1256C10G05
LA2600F
LA2600FS
HLA2600F
2603D46G10
500
2500
5000
LA2500
LA2500S
HLA2500
LA2600F
LA2600FS
HLA2600F
HLA2500T
600
3000
6000
LA2600
LA2600S
HLA2600
LA2600F
LA2600FS
HLA2600F
HLA2600T
8
9
Three-Pole, 600 Vac Only
250
1250
2500
2603D50G07
2603D50G019
1256C10G12
LA3600F
LA3600FS
HLA3600F
2603D46G26
300
1500
3000
2603D50G08
2603D50G020
1256C10G13
LA3600F
LA3600FS
HLA3600F
2603D46G27
350
1750
3500
2603D50G09
2603D50G021
1256C10G14
LA3600F
LA3600FS
HLA3600F
2603D46G28
400
2000
4000
2603D50G10
2603D50G022
1256C10G15
LA3600F
LA3600FS
HLA3600F
2603D46G29
500
2500
5000
LA3500
LA3500S
HLA500
LA3600F
LA3600FS
HLA3600F
HLA3500T
600
3000
6000
LA3600
LA3600S
HLA3600
LA3600F
LA3600FS
HLA3600F
HLA3600T
600A Frame Breakers
Magnetic Trip Setting, Amperes
Low
4—Magnetic
7
10
11
12
Type Special Breakers 6—Trip Units Only
Continuous
Ampere Rating
6
High
Two-Pole 5
Catalog Number
Three-Pole
Catalog Number
13
14
Only Breakers, Front Adjustable
600
1125
2250
2603D47G07
2603D47G26
600
1500
3000
2603D47G08
2603D47G27
600
2000
4000
2603D47G10
2603D47G29
600
2500
5000
HLA25000TM
HLA35000TM
600
3000
6000
HLA26000TM
HLA36000TM
16
17
15
600A Frame Breakers—Ambient Compensating Breakers
250
1250
2500
5683D88G07
5683D88G26
300
1500
3000
5683D88G08
5683D88G27
350
1750
3500
5683D88G09
5683D88G28
400
2000
4000
5683D88G10
5683D88G29
500
2500
5000
HLA2500TA
HLA3500TA
600
3000
6000
HLA2600TA
HLA3600TA
18
19
20
Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.
2
Set on high side, adjustable to lower limits.
3
Terminals shipped separately from breakers.
Terminals, trip units and accessories are not interchangeable between 400 and 600A frames.
Two-pole breakers or trips are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole.
Not UL Listed.
4
5
6
21
22
23
24
25
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
V12-T3-37
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
Accessories and
Modifications
UL Listed Interrupting
Ratings 1
■
Maximum
Volts
Shaded area denotes
obsolete or discontinued
products and services.
Special Calibrations
Special calibration price
additions apply to ampere
ratings not listed as standard
or for ambients other
than 40°C or 50°C. For
frequencies other than
0–60 Hz AC, refer to Eaton.
See Application Data 29-160
for information regarding
special conditions.
Maximum 400 Hz calibration:
600A frame, 450A.
240 AC
50,000 asymmetrical,
42,000 symmetrical
480 AC
35,000 asymmetrical,
30,000 symmetrical
600 AC
25,000 asymmetrical,
22,000 symmetrical
250 DC
20,000 2
MARK 75 Breakers
240 AC
75,000 asymmetrical,
65,000 symmetrical
480 AC
40,000 asymmetrical,
35,000 symmetrical
600 AC
30,000 asymmetrical,
25,000 symmetrical
250 DC
20,000 2
Note: Not UL Listed.
50°C Calibration
Add suffix “V” to catalog
number for complete breaker
or trip unit only, when
ordering breakers to be used
in 50°C ambients. Same price
as standard 40°C breakers.
For CSA, see
Page V12-T3-48.
Amperes
Standard Breakers
Terminals
Two terminals are required
per pole. Terminals are UL
Listed for wire type and range
listed below. When used with
aluminum cable, use joint
compound. To order optional
copper only terminals, add
suffix “C” to complete
breaker catalog number.
Accessories and
Modifications
Refer to Pages V12-T3-65–
V12-T3-79.
Note: Terminals shipped
separately from breakers.
Terminals, trip units and
accessories are not
interchangeable between
400 and 600A frames.
Terminals
Maximum
Amperes
Number of Cables,
Wire Range, Type
Catalog
Number
Standard Al/Cu Pressure Terminals
600 3
For all three-phase
delta, grounded B phase
applications, contact
Avery Creek, NC, Technical
Resource Center at
1-800-356-1243.
Magnetic Only Breakers
To order, select frame, trip
unit and terminals from tables
on this page.
(2) 250–500 kcmil Al/Cu
TA600LA
Optional Copper Pressure Terminals
600 3
(2) 250–500 kcmil Cu
T600LA
Notes
1 Interrupting capacities shown do not apply to molded case switches.
2 Ratings above 10,000A not UL Listed.
3 For 600A frame breakers only.
Type LA breakers meet
requirements for Class 21a
circuit breakers, and type
HLA meet requirements
for Class 23a as defined
by Federal Specification
W-C-375b.
Note: Not UL Listed. MARK 75
frame color changed from gray
to black in mid-2002.
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T3-38
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
3
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
Type LAY
1
■
Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1
Type LAY 250–600A, 240 Vac, Three-Pole, Interchangeable Trip Thermal-Magnetic, 600A Frame 2
LAY: 240 Vac
Complete Breaker
Shipped as Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals 5
Magnetic Trip Setting Amperes 3
Includes Pressure Type
Aluminum Terminals 4 Frame Only
Low
High
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
250
1250
2500
LAY3250
LAY3600F
2603D46G26
300
1500
3000
LAY3300
LAY3600F
2603D46G27
350
1750
3500
LAY3350
LAY3600F
2603D46G28
400
2000
4000
LAY3400
LAY3600F
2603D46G29
500
2500
5000
LAY3500
LAY3600F
HLA3500T
600
3000
6000
LAY3600
LAY3600F
HLA3600T
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C
Accessories and
Modifications
■
Shaded area denotes
obsolete or discontinued
products and services.
Special Calibrations
Special calibration price
additions apply to ampere
ratings not listed as standard
or for ambients other
than 40°C or 50°C. For
frequencies other than
0–60 Hz AC, refer to
Eaton. See Application
Data 29-160 for information
regarding special conditions.
Maximum 400 Hz calibration:
600A frame, 450A.
Note: Not UL Listed.
50°C Calibration
Add suffix “V” to catalog
number for complete breaker
or trip unit only, when
ordering breakers to be used
in 50°C ambients. Same price
as standard 40°C breakers.
For CSA, see
Page V12-T3-48.
Type LAY breakers are
not defined by Federal
Specification W-C-375b.
Note: Not UL Listed.
For all three-phase
delta, grounded B phase
applications, contact
Avery Creek, NC, Technical
Resource Center at
1-800-356-1243.
Trip Unit Only
5
6
7
UL Listed
Interrupting Ratings
Maximum
Volts
Amperes
8
240 AC
9
115,000 asymmetrical,
100,000 symmetrical
Terminals
Two terminals are required
per pole.
10
11
Terminals are UL Listed for
wire type and range listed
below. When used with
aluminum cable, use joint
compound.
12
13
Note: Terminals shipped
separately from breaker.
14
Additional Accessories
and Modifications
15
Refer to Pages V12-T3-65–
V12-T3-79.
16
Number of Cables, Wire Range, Type
Catalog Number
17
Standard Al/Cu Pressure Terminals
500 5
(2) 3/0–250 kcmil Al/Cu
TA602LD
600 5
(2) 400–500 kcmil Al/Cu
TA603LA
5
(2) 250–500 kcmil Al/Cu
TA600LA
600
18
19
Optional Copper Pressure Terminals
600 6
3
4
Terminals
Maximum Amperes
2
(2) 250–500 kcmil Cu
T600LA
20
Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.
2 Optional terminal.
3 Set on high side, adjustable to lower limits.
4 Terminals shipped separately from breaker.
5 For 600A frame breakers only.
6 Not UL Listed.
21
22
23
24
25
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
V12-T3-39
3
1
2
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
Types MA and HMA
■
Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1
Type MA 125–800A, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc 2, Two- and Three-Pole, Interchangeable Trip
MA: 600 Vac; 250 Vdc
Magnetic Trip
Setting Amperes 3
3
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40°C
4
Low
High
Complete Breaker
Shipped as Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals 4
Includes Pressure Type Copper Terminals 4
Frame Only
Standard
Catalog
Number
Saf-T-Vue
Catalog
Number
MARK 75
Catalog
Number
Standard
Catalog
Number
Saf-T-Vue
Catalog
Number
MARK 75
Catalog
Number
Standard
Saf-T-Vue,
MARK 75
Catalog Number
Trip Unit Only
Two-Pole, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc 25
5
125
625
1250
MA2125
MA2125S
HMA2125
MA2800F
MA2800FS
HMA2800F
HMA2125T
150
750
1500
MA2150
MA2150S
HMA2150
MA2800F
MA2800FS
HMA2800F
HMA2150T
6
175
875
1750
MA2175
MA2175S
HMA2175
MA2800F
MA2800FS
HMA2800F
HMA2175T
200
1000
2000
MA2200
MA2200S
HMA2200
MA2800F
MA2800FS
HMA2800F
HMA2200T
7
225
1125
2250
MA2225
MA2225S
HMA2225
MA2800F
MA2800FS
HMA2800F
HMA2225T
250
1250
2500
MA2250
MA2250S
HMA2250
MA2800F
MA2800FS
HMA2800F
HMA2250T
8
300
1500
3000
MA2300
MA2300S
HMA2300
MA2800F
MA2800FS
HMA2800F
HMA2300T
350
1750
3500
MA2350
MA2350S
HMA2350
MA2800F
MA2800FS
HMA2800F
HMA2350T
9
400
2000
4000
MA2400
MA2400S
HMA2400
MA2800F
MA2800FS
HMA2800F
HMA2400T
500
2500
5000
MA2500
MA2500S
HMA2500
MA2800F
MA2800FS
HMA2800F
HMA2500T
10
600
3000
6000
MA2600
MA2600S
HMA2600
MA2800F
MA2800FS
HMA2800F
HMA2600T
700
3000
6000
MA2700 6
MA2700S
HMA2700
MA2800F
MA2800FS
HMA2800F
HMA2700T 6
6
MA2800S
HMA2800
MA2800F
MA2800FS
HMA2800F
HMA2800T 6
MA2800WSK
—
—
—
—
Incl. in Frame
11
800
3000
6000
MA2800
800
MCS 7
—
MA2800WK
Approx. shipping weight 37 lbs
12
Approx. shipping weight 24 lbs
Approx. shipping
weight 3.5 lbs
Three-Pole, 600 Vac Only
13
125
625
1250
MA3125
MA3125S
HMA3125
MA3800F
MA3800FS
HMA3800F
HMA3125T
150
750
1500
MA3150
MA3150S
HMA3150
MA3800F
MA3800FS
HMA3800F
HMA3150T
14
175
875
1750
MA3175
MA3175S
HMA3175
MA3800F
MA3800FS
HMA3800F
HMA3175T
200
1000
2000
MA3200
MA3200S
HMA3200
MA3800F
MA3800FS
HMA3800F
HMA3200T
15
225
1125 7
2250
MA3225
MA3225S
HMA3225
MA3800F
MA3800FS
HMA3800F
HMA3225T
250
1250
2500
MA3250
MA3250S
HMA3250
MA3800F
MA3800FS
HMA3800F
HMA3250T
16
300
1500
3000
MA3300
MA3300S
HMA3300
MA3800F
MA3800FS
HMA3800F
HMA3300T
350
1750
3500
MA3350
MA3350S
HMA3350
MA3800F
MA3800FS
HMA3800F
HMA3350T
17
400
2000
4000
MA3400
MA3400S
HMA3400
MA3800F
MA3800FS
HMA3800F
HMA3400T
500
2500
5000
MA3500
MA3500S
HMA3500
MA3800F
MA3800FS
HMA3800F
HMA3500T
600
3000
6000
MA3600
MA3600S
HMA3600
MA3800F
MA3800FS
HMA3800F
HMA3600T
700
3000
6000
MA3700 6
MA3700S
HMA3700
MA3800F
MA3800FS
HMA3800F
HMA3700T 6
800
3000
6000
MA3800 6
MA3800S
HMA3800
MA3800F
MA3800FS
HMA3800F
HMA3800T 6
800
MCS 7
—
MA3800WK
MA3800WSK
—
—
—
—
Incl. in Frame
18
19
Approx. shipping weight 44 lbs
20
Approx. shipping weight 28 lbs
Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.
2 Above 600A, DC rating applies to magnetic only breakers.
3 Set on high side, adjustable to lower limits.
4 Terminals are shipped separately from breaker.
5 Two-pole breakers are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole.
6 60 Hz AC only.
7 Interrupting capacities shown do not apply to high magnetic molded-case switches.
21
22
23
MARK 75 frame color changed from gray to black in mid-2002. Also magnetic only trip units available: HMA8000TM 4000–8000A.
24
25
V12-T3-40
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
Approx. shipping
weight 4 lbs
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
■
Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products
and services. 1
Magnetic Only Breakers, Front Adjustable 2
Magnetic
Trip Range 4
Trip Unit Only
Two-Pole 4
Three-Pole
Low
High
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
800
625
1250
HMA21250TM
HMA31250TM
800
1000
2000
HMA22000TM
HMA32000TM
800
1500
3000
HMA23000TM
HMA33000TM
800
2000
4000
HMA24000TM
HMA34000TM
800
3000
6000
HMA26000TM
HMA36000TM
800
4000
8000
HMA28000TM
HMA38000TM
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
Ambient Compensating Breakers 2
Magnetic
Trip Range 3
Type MA Accessories
and Modifications
Special Calibrations
Special calibration price
additions apply to ampere
ratings not listed as standard
or for ambients other
than 40°C or 50°C. For
frequencies other than
0–60 Hz AC (50 Hz AC
minimum, 60 Hz AC
maximum, refer to Eaton.
See Application Data 29-160
for additional information
regarding special conditions.
3
For CSA, see
Page V12-T3-48.
1
Type MA breakers meet
requirements for Class 21a
circuit breakers, and Type
HMA meet requirements
for Class 23a, as defined
by Federal Specification
W-C-375b.
2
For all three-phase
delta, grounded B phase
applications, contact
Avery Creek, NC, Technical
Resource Center at
1-800-356-1243.
Note: Not UL Listed.
Trip Unit Only
3
4
5
6
7
Low
High
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
125
625
1250
HMA2125TA
HMA3125TA
150
750
1500
HMA2150TA
HMA3150TA
175
875
1750
HMA2175TA
HMA3175TA
50°C Calibration
Add suffix “V” to catalog
number for complete
breaker or trip unit only,
when ordering breakers to
be used in 50°C ambients.
200
1000
2000
HMA2200TA
HMA3200TA
Note: Not UL Listed.
220
1125
2250
HMA2225TA
HMA3225TA
10
250
1250
2500
HMA2250TA
HMA3250TA
Type MA UL Listed Interrupting Ratings 5
300
1500
3000
HMA2300TA
HMA3300TA
1750
3500
HMA2350TA
HMA3350TA
Maximum
Volts
11
350
400
2000
4000
HMA2400TA
HMA3400TA
Standard Breakers
500
2500
5000
HMA2500TA
HMA3500TA
240 AC
50,000 asymmetrical, 42,000 symmetrical
600
3000
6000
HMA2600TA
HMA3600TA
480 AC
35,000 asymmetrical, 30,000 symmetrical
700
3000
6000
HMA2700TA
HMA3700TA
600 AC
25,000 asymmetrical, 22,000 symmetrical
800
3000
6000
HMA2800TA
HMA3800TA
250 DC 6
20,000 7
14
240 AC
75,000 asymmetrical, 65,000 symmetrical
480 AC
40,000 asymmetrical, 35,000 symmetrical
15
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
Two-Pole
Three-Pole
8
9
Amperes
12
13
MARK 75 Breakers
600 AC
30,000 asymmetrical, 25,000 symmetrical
250 DC 6
20,000 7
16
Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on
Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.
2 Not UL Listed.
3 Set on high side, adjustable to lower limits.
4 Two-pole breakers are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from
center pole.
5 Interrupting capacities shown do not apply to high magnetic molded-case switches.
6 Above 600A, DC rating applies to magnetic only breakers.
7 Ratings above 10,000A not UL Listed.
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
V12-T3-41
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products
and services.
Type MAY Accessories and Modifications
Terminals
Two terminals are required
per pole.
Type MAY 600–800A, 240 Vac, Three-Pole,
Interchangeable Trip 1
■
Terminals are UL Listed for
wire type and range listed
below. When used with
aluminum conductors, use
joint compound.
Note: Terminals are shipped
separately from breaker.
Magnetic Only and Ambient
Compensating Breakers
To order a complete breaker,
select trip unit plus frame
and terminals.
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40°C
Magnetic Trip
Setting, Amperes 3
Complete
Breaker
Shipped as Frame,
Trip Unit and Terminals 4
Low
Includes Pressure
Type Aluminum
Terminals 4
Catalog Number
Frame
Only
Catalog
Number
Trip Unit
Only
Catalog
Number
High
Three-Pole, 240 Vac Only
Terminals 1
600
3000
6000
MAY3600
MAY3800F
HMA3600T
Maximum
Amperes
700 e
3000
6000
MAY3700
MAY3800F
HMA3700T
e
3000
6000
MAY3800
MAY3800F
HMA3800T
Number of Cables,
Wire Range, Type
Catalog
Number
800
Standard Al/Cu Pressure Terminals
7
600
(2) #1–500 kcmil Al/Cu
TA700MA1
800 (Std.)
(3) 3/0–400 kcmil Al/Cu
TA800MA2
8
800 2
(2) 500–750 kcmil Al/Cu
TA801MA
Type MAY breakers are
not defined by Federal
Specification W-C-375b.
Note: Not UL listed.
Optional Copper Pressure Terminals
9
350
(1) #1–600 kcmil Cu
T350MA
600
(2) 2/0–500 kcmil Cu
T600MA1
10
800
(3) 3/0–300 kcmil Cu
T800MA1
Type MAY UL Listed
Interrupting Ratings
Maximum
Volts
240 Vac
11
Amperes
115,000 asymmetrical,
100,000 symmetrical
For all three-phase
delta, grounded B phase
applications, contact
Avery Creek, NC, Technical
Resource Center at
1-800-356-1243.
12
13
Additional Accessories
and Modifications
Refer to Pages V12-T3-65–
V12-T3-79.
Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For
replacement solutions, see the crossreference on Pages V12-T3-114–
V12-T3-167.
2 Not UL Listed.
3 Set on high side, adjustable to
lower limits.
4 Terminals are shipped separately
from breaker.
e 60 Hz AC only.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T3-42
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
3
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
Types NB and NHB
1
■
Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1
Type NB 700–1200A, 600V, 60 Hz AC 2, 250 Vdc 3, Two- and Three-Pole Interchangeable Trip
NB: 600 Vac; 250 Vdc
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40°C
Magnetic Trip
Setting, Amperes 4
Low
High
2
Complete Breaker
Shipped as Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals 5
Includes Pressure Type Copper Terminals 5
Frame Only
Standard
Catalog
Number
Saf-T-Vue
Catalog
Number
MARK 75
Catalog
Number
Standard
Catalog
Number
Saf-T-Vue
Catalog
Number
MARK 75
Catalog
Number
Standard Saf-T-Vue,
MARK 75
Catalog Number
Trip Unit Only
Two-Pole, 600 Vac, 250V DC 36
700
3000
6000
NB2700
NB2700S
HNB2700
NB21200F
NB21200FS
HNB21200F
HNB2700T
800
3000
6000
NB2800
NB2800S
HNB2800
NB21200F
NB21200FS
HNB21200F
HNB2800T
900
4000
8000
NB2900
NB2900S
HNB2900
NB21200F
NB21200FS
HNB21200F
HNB2900T
1000
4000
8000
NB21000
NB21000S
HNB21000
NB21200F
NB21200FS
HNB21200F
HNB21000T
1200
4000
8000
NB21200
NB21200S
HNB21200
NB21200F
NB21200FS
HNB21200F
HNB21200T
600
3000
6000
—
HNB31200F
—
—
—
Approx. shipping weight 43 lbs
—
Approx. shipping weight 29 lbs
HNB3600T
Approx. shipping
weight 3.5 lbs
Three-Pole, 600 Vac Only
700
3000
6000
NB3700
NB3700S
HNB3700
NB31200F
NB31200FS
HNB31200F
HNB3700T
800
3000
6000
NB3800
NB3800S
HNB3800
NB31200F
NB31200FS
HNB31200F
HNB3800T
900
4000
8000
NB3900
NB3900S
HNB3900
NB31200F
NB31200FS
HNB31200F
HNB3900T
1000
4000
8000
NB31000
NB31000S
HNB31000
NB31200F
NB31200FS
HNB31200F
HNB31000T
1200
4000
8000
NB31200
NB31200S
HNB31200
NB31200F
NB31200FS
HNB31200F
Approx. shipping weight 51 lbs
Approx. shipping weight 32 lbs
HNB31200T
Approx. shipping
weight 4 lbs
Trip Unit Only
Magnetic Trip Range 4
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Magnetic Only Breakers, Front Adjustable 78
Two-Pole 6
Three-Pole
Low
High
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
1200
3000
6000
HNB26000TM
HNB36000TM
1200
4000
8000
HNB28000TM
HNB38000TM
1200
5000
10000
HNB210000TM
HNB310000TM
1200
6000
12000
HNB212000TM
HNB312000TM
Continuous
Ampere Rating
3
13
14
15
16
Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.
2 Higher frequency calibration not available. Minimum of 50 Hz calibration available on special order.
3 250 Vdc rating applied only to magnetic only type breakers.
4 Set on high side, adjustable to lower limits.
5 Terminals shipped separately from breaker.
6 Two-pole breakers supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole.
7 Frames, terminals, studs, mounting hardware, dimensions and shipping weights are same as standard thermal-magnetic breakers.
8 Not UL Listed.
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
V12-T3-43
3
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
Accessories and
Modifications
1
UL Listed Interrupting Ratings
2
Standard Breakers
240 AC
50,000 asymmetrical, 42,000 symmetrical
3
480 AC
35,000 asymmetrical, 30,000 symmetrical
600 AC
25,000 asymmetrical, 22,000 symmetrical
250 DC 12
20,000 3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Maximum Volts
Amperes
■
MARK 75 Breakers
240 AC
75,000 asymmetrical, 65,000 symmetrical
480 AC
40,000 asymmetrical, 35,000 symmetrical
600 AC
30,000 asymmetrical, 25,000 symmetrical
250 DC 12
20,000 3
Terminals 4
Maximum
Amperes
Number of Cables,
Wire Range, Type,
Catalog
Number
Standard Al/Cu Pressure Terminals
1000
(3) 3/0–400 kcmil Al/Cu
TA1000NB1
1200
(4) 4/0–500 kcmil Al/Cu
TA1200NB1
Optional Copper or Al/Cu Pressure Terminals
(3) 3/0–500 kcmil Cu
T1000NB1
1200
(4) 3/0–400 kcmil Cu
T1200NB1
1200
(3) 500–750 kcmil Al/Cu
TA1201NB1
13
Special Calibrations
Special calibration price
additions apply to ampere
ratings not listed as standard
or for ambients other
than 40°C or 50°C. For
frequencies other than
0–60 Hz AC (50 Hz AC
minimum, 60 Hz AC
maximum for ratings of
700A and above), refer
to Eaton. See Application
Data 29-160 for additional
information regarding
special conditions.
Maximum 400 Hz
calibration for type MA
is 475A.
Note: Not UL Listed.
1000
12
Shaded area denotes
obsolete or discontinued
products and services.
50°C Calibration
Add suffix “V” to catalog
number for complete breaker
or trip unit only, when
ordering breakers to be used
in 50°C ambients. For CSA,
see Page V12-T3-48.
Note: Not UL Listed.
14
Terminals
Two terminals are required
per pole.
Terminals are UL Listed for
wire type and range listed
below. When used with
aluminum conductors, use
joint compound. To order
optional copper terminals,
add suffix “C” to complete
breaker catalog number.
Note: Frames, terminals, studs,
mounting hardware, dimensions
and shipping weights are same
as standard thermal magnetic
breakers.
Magnetic Only Breakers
To order a complete breaker,
select trip unit, plus frame
and terminals.
Note: Not UL Listed.
Additional Accessories
and Modifications
Refer to Pages V12-T3-65–
V12-T3-79.
Notes
1 250 Vdc rating applied only to magnetic
only type breakers.
2 Terminals shipped separately from
breaker.
3 Ratings above 10,000A not UL Listed.
4 MARK 75 frame color changed from gray
to black in mid-2002.
Type NB breakers meet
requirements for Class 21a
circuit breakers, and Type
HNB meet requirements
for Class 23a, as defined
by Federal Specification
W-C-375b.
15
16
17
For all three-phase
delta, grounded B phase
applications, contact
Avery Creek, NC, Technical
Resource Center at
1-800-356-1243.
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T3-44
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
3
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
Type NBY
1
■
Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1
Type NBY 700–1200A, 240V, 60 Hz AC 2, Three-Pole, Interchangeable Trip
NBY: 240 Vac
Complete Breaker
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C
Magnetic Trip Setting
Amperes 3
Low
Shipped as Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals
4
Frame Only
Trip Unit Only
High
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
3
4
Three-Pole, 600 Vac Only
700
3000
6000
NBY3700
NBY31200F
HNB3700T
800
3000
6000
NBY3800
NBY31200F
HNB3800T
900
4000
8000
NBY3900
NBY31200F
HNB3900T
1200
4000
8000
NBY31200
NBY31200F
HNB31200T
UL Listed
Interrupting Ratings
Maximum
Volts
Amperes
240 AC
115,000 asymmetrical,
100,000 symmetrical
For all three-phase
delta, grounded B phase
applications, contact
Avery Creek, NC, Technical
Resource Center at
1-800-356-1243.
Terminals
Two terminals are required
per pole.
Terminals are UL Listed for
wire type and range listed
below. When used with
aluminum conductors, use
joint compound.
Note: Terminals shipped
separately from breaker.
Terminals
Number
of Cables,
Max.
Wire Range,
Amperes Type,
Catalog
Number
Standard Al/Cu
Pressure Terminals
1000
2
Includes Pressure Type
Aluminum Terminals 4
(3) 3/0–400 kcmil
Al/Cu
TA1000NB1
1200
(4) 4/0–500 kcmil
Al/Cu
TA1200NB1
1200
(3) 500–750 kcmil TA1201NB1
Al/Cu
Accessories
and Modifications
■
Shaded area denotes
obsolete or discontinued
products and services.
Special Calibrations
Special calibration price
additions apply to ampere
ratings not listed as
standard or for ambients
other than 40°C or 50°C.
For frequencies other than
0–60 Hz AC (50 Hz AC
minimum, 60 Hz AC
maximum), refer to Eaton.
See Application Data 29-160
for additional information
regarding special
conditions.
Note: Not UL Listed.
Alternate Copper
Pressure Terminals
1000
(3) 3/0–500 kcmil
Cu
T1000NB1
1200
(4) 3/0–400 kcmil
Cu
T1200NB1
5
6
50°C Calibration
Add suffix “V” to catalog
number for complete breaker
or trip unit only, when
ordering for breakers to be
used in 50°C ambients.
Note: Not UL Listed.
7
8
9
10
For CSA, see
Page V12-T3-48.
Type NBY breakers are
not defined by Federal
Specification W-C-375b.
Additional Accessories
and Modifications
Refer to Pages V12-T3-65–
V12-T3-79.
Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For
replacement solutions, see the crossreference on Pages V12-T3-114–
V12-T3-167.
2 Higher frequency calibration not
available. Minimum of 50 Hz calibration
available on special order.
3 Set on high side, adjustable to
lower limits.
4 Terminals shipped separately
from breaker.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
V12-T3-45
3
1
2
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
Type PB
■
Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1
Type PB 600–25s00A, 600V, 60 Cycle AC 2, 250 Vdc 3, Two- and Three-Pole, Interchangeable Trip
Rear Connected PB
Breaker: 600 Vac
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C
3
Magnetic Trip Setting,
Amperes 45
Complete Breaker
Shipped as Frame, Trip Unit and Rear Connectors
Includes Busbar Connectors 6
Frame Only
Trip Unit Only
Low
High
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
Two-Pole, 600 Vac Only 7
4
600
1500
5000
PB2600
PB22500F
PB2600T
700
1500
5000
PB2700
PB22500F
PB2700T
5
800
1500
5000
PB2800
PB22500F
PB2800T
900
1500
5000
PB2900
PB22500F
PB2900T
6
1000
1500
5000
PB21000
PB22500F
PB21000T
1200
2000
6000
PB21200
PB22500F
PB21200T
7
1400
2500
7000
PB21400
PB22500F
PB21400T
1600
3000
8000
PB21600
PB22500F
PB21600T
8
1800
3000
8000
PB21800
PB22500F
PB21800T
2000
3000
8000
PB22000
PB22500F
PB22000T
Approx. shipping weight
132 lbs
98 lbs
18 lbs
3000
PB22500
PB22500F
PB22500T
144 lbs
98 lbs
18 lbs
9
2500
8000
Approx. shipping weight
10
Three-Pole, 600 Vac Only—Not UL Listed
600
1500
5000
PB3600
PB32500F
PB3600T
700
1500
5000
PB3700
PB32500F
PB3700T
800
1500
5000
PB3800
PB32500F
PB3800T
900
1500
5000
PB3900
PB32500F
PB3900T
1000
1500
5000
PB31000
PB32500F
PB31000T
1200
2000
6000
PB31200
PB32500F
PB31200T
1400
2500
7000
PB31400
PB32500F
PB31400T
1600
3000
8000
PB31600
PB32500F
PB31600T
1800
3000
8000
PB31800
PB32500F
PB31800T
15
2000
3000
8000
PB32000
PB32500F
PB32000T
Approx. shipping weight
155 lbs
108 lbs
23 lbs
16
2500
3000
PB32500
PB32500F
PB32500T
173 lbs
108 lbs
23 lbs
11
12
13
14
8000
Approx. shipping weight
17
Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.
2 Higher frequency calibration not available. Minimum of 50 Hz calibration available on special order.
3 Available only on magnetic only breakers.
4 Higher magnetic trip settings are available as special calibration. Refer to magnetic only breakers for specific trip ranges.
5 Set on high side, adjustable to lower limits.
6 Shipped separately from breaker.
7 Two-pole breakers are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole.
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T3-46
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
3
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
Type PBF
1
■
Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1
Type PBF Front-Connected 600–2000A, 600V, 60 Cycle AC 2, 250 Vdc 3, Two- and Three-Pole,
PBF Front Connected:
Interchangeable Trip
600 Vac
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40°C
2
3
Magnetic Trip Setting, Amperes
(Set on High Side, Adjustable
to Lower Limits)
Complete Breaker
Shipped As:
Includes Busbar
Connectors 4
Frame Only Includes
Busbar Connectors 4
Trip Unit
Only
Low
High
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
4
5
Two-Pole, 600 Vac 5
600
1500
5000
PBF2600
PBF22000F
PBF2600T
700
1500
5000
PBF2700
PBF22000F
PBF2700T
800
1500
5000
PBF2800
PBF22000F
PBF2800T
900
1500
5000
PBF2900
PBF22000F
PBF2900T
1000
1500
5000
PBF21000
PBF22000F
PBF21000T
1200
2000
6000
PBF21200
PBF22000F
PBF21200T
1400
2500
7000
PBF21400
PBF22000F
PBF21400T
1600
3000
8000
PBF21600
PBF22000F
PBF21600T
1800
3000
8000
PBF21800
PBF22000F
PBF21800T
2000
3000
8000
PBF22000
PBF22000F
PBF22000T
9
10
Three-Pole, 600 Vac—Not UL Listed
600
1500
5000
PBF3600
PBF32000F
PBF3600T
700
1500
5000
PBF3700
PBF32000F
PBF3700T
800
1500
5000
PBF3800
PBF32000F
PBF3800T
900
1500
5000
PBF3900
PBF32000F
PBF3900T
1000
1500
5000
PBF31000
PBF32000F
PBF31000T
1200
2000
6000
PBF31200
PBF32000F
PBF31200T
1400
2500
7000
PBF31400
PBF32000F
PBF31400T
1600
3000
8000
PBF31600
PBF32000F
PBF31600T
1800
3000
8000
PBF31800
PBF32000F
PBF31800T
2000
3000
8000
PBF32000
PBF32000F
PBF32000T
Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.
2 Higher frequency calibration not available. Minimum of 50 Hz calibration available on special order.
3 Available only on magnetic only breakers.
4 Included with frame.
5 Two-pole breakers are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole.
6
7
8
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
V12-T3-47
3
1
2
3
4
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
Types PB and PBF Accessories and Modifications
Interrupting Ratings
■
Maximum Volts
Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products
and services. 1
PB breakers are not UL Listed.
Special Breakers 2 Magnetic Only, Front Adjustable 3
Trip Unit Only
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
Amperes
2
150,000 asymmetrical, 125,000 symmetrical
480 AC 2
115,000 asymmetrical, 100,000 symmetrical
600 AC 2
115,000 asymmetrical, 100,000 symmetrical
250 DC 2
75,000A 6
240 AC
Magnetic Trip Range,
Amperes 4
Two-Pole 5
Three-Pole
Low
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
For all three-phase delta, grounded B phase applications, contact
Avery Creek, NC, Technical Resource Center at 1-800-356-1243.
High
For Rear-Connected Type PB Breakers
2000
2000
6000
PB26000TM
PB36000TM
6
Magnetic Only Breakers
To order a complete breaker, select trip unit, plus frame
and connectors.
2000
2500
7000
PB27000TM
PB37000TM
Note: Not UL Listed.
2000
3000
8000
PB28000TM
PB38000TM
7
2000
3500
10,000
PB210000TM
PB310000TM
2000
4000
12,000
PB212000TM
PB312000TM
8
2500
4000
12,000
373D488G08
373D488G09
5
2000
1500
5000
PB25000TM
PB35000TM
9
5000
PBF25000TM
PBF35000TM
2000
2000
6000
PBF26000TM
PBF36000TM
10
2000
2500
7000
PBF27000TM
PBF37000TM
2000
3000
8000
PBF28000TM
PBF38000TM
11
2000
3500
10,000
PBF210000TM
PBF310000TM
2000
4000
12,000
PBF212000TM
PBF312000TM
14
15
16
17
18
19
Busbar Connections—“T” Connector
(For Cu/AI Bus)
Catalog Number
1500
13
“T” Connector
For Front-Connected Type PBF Breakers
2000
12
Busbar Connections
BA2000PB
Two required per pole. For rear bus connection of breakers
through 2000A. Accepts up to four bus bolts. May be rotated 90°.
Note: Shipped separately from breaker.
Accessories
and Modifications
■
Shaded area denotes
obsolete or discontinued
products and services.
Special Calibrations
Special calibration price
additions apply to ampere
ratings not listed as
standard, or for ambients
other than 40°C or 50°C.
For frequencies other than
0–60 Hz AC, refer to Eaton.
See Application Data 29-160
for information regarding
special conditions.
Note: Not UL Listed.
20
50°C Calibration
Add suffix “V” to catalog
number for complete
breaker or trip unit only,
when ordering breakers to
be used in 50°C ambients.
Type PB breakers meet the
requirements for Class 25a
circuit breakers as defined
by Federal Specification
W-C-375b.
“C” Connector
“C” Connector (For Cu/AI Bus)
Breaker Amperes
Catalog Number
2500
BA2500PB
Two required per pole. For rear bus connection of
2500A breakers.
Cable Connector
Cable Connector
Catalog Number
505C706G04
Fits “T” Connector and 2000A front-connected breakers.
Accepts four 400–600 kcmil copper cables.
Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference
on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.
2 Not UL Listed.
3 Frames, connectors, dimensions and shipping weights are same as thermal-magnetic
breakers.
4 Set on high side, adjustable to lower limits.
5 Two-pole breakers are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted
from center pole.
6 Based on NEMA test procedure.
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T3-48
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
3
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
Types LC, LCC, LCA, LCCA, MARK 75 Types HLC, HLCC, HLCA, HLCCA SELTRONIC with Solid-State Trip Units 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz
Complete breaker requires frame and rating plug. See the table and terminals on Page V12-T3-60. Extra current transformer included
for neutral. See accessories on Page V12-T3-65 for remote ground fault trip indicator.
■
Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1
Breakers for Standard Applications—Frame Only
LCA: 600 Vac
Number
of Poles 2
1
2
3
Standard
(Long Delay and Short Time)
Short Time Only 3
Long Delay, Short Time and Adjustable
Short Delay Time (0.06–0.22 sec.)
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
4
Types LC 150 and LCA 150 (75–150A)
2
LC2150F
LC2150FM
LCA2150F
3
LC3150F
LC3150FM
LCA3150F
5
6
MARK 75 Types HLC 150 and HLCA 150 (75–150A)
2
HLC2150F
HLC2150FM
HLCA2150F
3
HLC3150F
HLC3150FM
HLCA3150F
7
Types LC 300 and LCA 300 (150–300A)
2
LC2300F
LC2300FM
LCA2300F
3
LC3300F
LC3300FM
LCA3300F
8
9
MARK 75 Types HLC 300 and HLCA 300 (150–300A)
2
HLC2300F
HLC2300FM
HLCA2300F
3
HLC3300F
HLC3300FM
HLCA3300F
10
Types LC 400 and LCA 400 (200–400A)
2
LC2400F
LC2400FM
LCA2400F
3
LC3400F
LC3400FM
LCA3400F
11
12
MARK 75 Types HLC 400 and HLCA 400 (200–400A)
2
HLC2400F
HLC2400FM
HLCA2400F
3
HLC3400F
HLC3400FM
HLCA3400F
13
Types LC 600 and LCA 600 (300–600A)
2
LC2600F
LC2600FM
LCA2600F
3
LC3600F
LC3600FM
LCA3600F
14
15
MARK 75 Types HLC 600 and HLCA 600 (300–600A)
2
HLC2600F
HLC2600FM
HLCA2600F
3
HLC3600F
HLC3600FM
HLCA3600F
16
Breakers for Applications at 100% Rating—Frame Only
Number of
Poles 2
Standard
(Long Delay and Short Time)
Short Time Only 3
Long Delay, Short Time and Adjustable
Short Delay Time (0.06–0.22 sec.)
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
—
LCCA3600F
18
Types LCC 600 and LCCA 600 (300–600A)
3
LCC3600F
19
MARK 75 Types HLCC 600 and HLCCA 600 (300–600A)
3
HLCC3600F
—
17
HLCCA3600F
20
Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.
2 Two-pole breakers are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole.
3 UL Recognized component.
21
MARK 75 frame color changed from gray to black in mid-2002.
22
23
24
25
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
V12-T3-49
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
Types LCG, LCCG, LCGA,
LCCGA, MARK 75 HLCG,
HLCCG, HLCGA, HLCCGA
SELTRONIC with Built-In
Ground Fault Protection
■
Complete breaker requires
frame and rating plug. See
the table and terminals on
Page V12-T3-60. Extra current
transformer included for
neutral. See accessories on
Page V12-T3-65 for remote
ground fault trip indicator.
Types LCG 150 and LCGA 150 (75–150A) 3
■
Shaded area denotes
obsolete or discontinued
products and services.
Note: Available without extra
CT for neutral. Order by
description as similar to above
except without neutral CT or
external CT terminal
connections at same price.
Note the standard ground fault
unit can also be used without
the neutral CT.
Note: These breakers use
LC terminals. The fourth
CT uses MC breaker terminals,
Page V12-T3-53.
Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services.
Breakers for Standard Application—Frame Only
Number
of Poles 2
3
Standard (Long Delay,
Short Time) and Ground Fault Trip
Long Delay, Short Time, Adjustable
Short Delay Time and Ground Fault Trip
Ground Fault Characteristics
Pickup Setting
Amperes
Time
Setting
LCGA3150F
50–150
3.5–30 Cy
HLCGA3150F
50–150
3.5–30 Cy
LCGA3300F
60–300
3.5–30 Cy
HLCGA3300F
60–300
3.5–30 Cy
LCGA3400F
0–400
3.5–30 Cy
80–400
3.5–30 Cy
120–600
3.5–30 Cy
120–600
3.5–30 Cy
Catalog Number
LCG3150F
MARK 75 Types HLCG 150 and HLCGA 150 (75–150A)
3
HLCG3150F
1
3
Types LCG 300 and LCGA 300 (150–300A) 3
3
LCG3300F
MARK 75 Types HLCG 300 and HLCGA 300 (150–300A) 3
3
HLCG3300F
Types LCG 400 and LCGA 400 (200–400A) 3
3
LCG3400F
MARK 75 Types HLCG 400 and HLCGA 400 (200–400A)
3
HLCG3400F
3
HLCGA3400F
Types LCG 600 and LCGA 600 (300–600 Amperes) 3
3
LCG3600F
LCGA3600F
MARK 75 Types HLCG 600 and HLCGA 600 (300–600A) 3
3
HLCG3600F
HLCGA3600F
Breakers for Application at 100% Rating—Frame Only
Number
of Poles 2
Standard (Long Delay,
Short Time) and Ground Fault Trip
Long Delay, Short Time, Adjustable
Short Delay Time and Ground Fault Trip
Catalog Number
Ground Fault Characteristics
Pickup Setting
Amperes
Time
Setting
120–600
3.5–30 Cy
120–600
3.5–30 Cy
Types LCCG 600 and LCCGA 600 (300–600A) 3
13
3
LCCG3600F
LCCGA3600F
MARK 75 Types HLCCG 600 and HLCCGA 600 (300–600A) 3
14
3
HLCCG3600F
HLCCGA3600F
Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.
2 Two-pole breakers supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole.
3 For applications other than standard residual scheme, see Application Data 29-160.
15
16
MARK 75 frame color changed from gray to black in mid-2002.
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T3-50
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
3
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
Types LCG, LCCG, LCGA, LCCGA, MARK 75 HLCG, HLCCG, HLCGA,
HLCCGA SELTRONIC with Built-In Ground Fault Protection
Accessories and Modifications
Field-Mountable Attachments
Additional Accessories and Modifications
1
Refer to Pages V12-T3-65–V12-T3-79.
Terminals
2
Note: Order separately.
12345
Description
Style Number
Two terminals are required per pole.
Provision to trip flux transfer shunt trip from external source
32 to 120 Vdc to 60 Hz 6
1371D11G22
Terminals are UL Listed for wire type and range listed below.
When used with aluminum cable, use joint compound.
240 to 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz 7
1371D11G32
Provision to trip flux transfer shunt trip from external source,
plus a 1A-1B auxiliary switch
32 to 120 Vdc to 60 Hz 6
1371D11G15
240 to 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz
7
150, 300 and 400A Frames Only
Maximum
Amperes
Number of Cables, Wire Range, Type
Catalog
Number
1371D11G25
Provision to trip flux transfer shunt trip from 24 Vdc source
1371D93G01
1A-1B auxiliary switch
1371D11G03
24 Vdc shunt trip and 1A-1B auxiliary switch
1371D94G08
Al/Cu Pressure Terminals
Type LC breakers meet requirements for Class 21a circuit
breakers, and Type HLC meet requirements for Class 23a as
defined by Federal Specification W-C-375b.
UL Listed Interrupting Ratings 8
Maximum Volts
Amperes
Standard Breakers
400
(1) #4–250 kcmil Al/Cu, plus (1) 3/0–600 kcmil Al/Cu
TA400LA1
7
8
225
(1) #6–350 kcmil Cu
T225LA
225
(1) #6–250 kcmil Cu
T225LBF
400
(1) #4–250 kcmil Cu, plus (1) 3/0–600 kcmil Cu
T401LA
600A Frame Only
Maximum
Amperes
Number of Cables, Wire Range, Type
Catalog
Number
Al/Cu Pressure Terminals
500
(2) 250–350 kcmil Al/Cu
TA602LD
480 AC
35,000 Asymmetrical, 30,000 Symmetrical
600
(2) 400–500 kcmil Al/Cu
TA603LA
600 AC
25,000 Asymmetrical, 22,000 Symmetrical
600 (std.)
(2) 250–500 kcmil Al/Cu
TA600LA
Optional Copper Pressure Terminals
75,000 Asymmetrical, 65,000 Symmetrical
480 AC
40,000 Asymmetrical, 35,000 Symmetrical
600 AC
30,000 Asymmetrical, 25,000 Symmetrical
For all three-phase delta, grounded B phase applications, contact
Avery Creek, NC, Technical Resource Center at 1-800-356-1243.
6
TA225LA1
50,000 Asymmetrical, 42,000 Symmetrical
240 AC
5
(1) #6–350 kcmil Cu, or (1) #4–350 kcmil Al
240 AC
MARK 75 Breakers
4
225
Optional Copper Pressure Terminals
For CSA, see Page V12-T3-48.
3
600
(2) 250–500 kcmil Cu
T600LA
Notes
1 Only one attachment may be mounted per breaker.
2 Contact Avery Creek, NC, Technical Resource Center for other combinations.
3 Molded-case switches do not use standard SELTRONIC attachments, and should be ordered
by description for factory mounting.
4 Does not void listing of UL Listed breakers.
5 Left pole mounting.
6 Rated 48 volts minimum for ground fault applications requiring tripping at 55% of voltage.
7 Not for use on ground fault applications.
8 Interrupting capacities shown do not apply to molded-case switches.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
MARK 75 frame color changed from gray to black in mid-2002.
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
V12-T3-51
3
1
2
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
Types MC, MCC, MCA, MCCA, MARK 75 Types HMC, HMCC, HMCA, HMCCA SELTRONIC with Solid-State Trip Units 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz
■
Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1
Breakers for Standard Applications—Frame Only
MCA: 600 Vac
Number
of Poles 2
3
Standard
(Long Delay and Short Time)
Short Time Only 3
Long Delay, Short Time and Adjustable
Short Delay Time (0.08 –0.30 seconds)
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
Types MC and MCA (400–800A)
4
2
MC2800F
MC2800FM
MCA2800F
3
MC3800F
MC3800FM
MCA3800F
5
MARK 75 Types HMC and HMCA (400–800A)
2
HMC2800F
HMC2800FM
HMCA2800F
6
3
HMC3800F
HMC3800FM
HMCA3800F
Breakers for Application at 100% Rating—Frame Only
7
Number
of Poles 2
8
1
Standard
(Long Delay and Short Time)
Short Time Only 3
Long Delay, Short Time and Adjustable
Short Delay Time (0.08 –0.30 seconds)
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
—
MCCA3800F
—
HMCCA3800F
Types MCC and MCCA (400–800A)
9
3
10
3
MCC3800F
MARK 75 Types HMCC and HMCCA (400–800A)
HMCC3800F
Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. Effective 2/1/02, only the MARK 75 version is available. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on
Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.
2 Two-pole breakers are supplied in three-pole frames with current-carrying parts omitted from center pole.
3 UL Recognized component.
11
12
Type MC800 molded-case switch; refer to Page V12-T3-62. MARK 75 frame color changed from gray to black in mid-2002.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T3-52
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
3
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
Types MCG, MCCG, MCGA, MCCGA and MARK 75 Types HMCG,
HMCCG, HMCGA, HMCCGA SELTRONIC with Built-In Ground
Fault Protection
Accessories and Modifications
Complete breaker requires frame and rating plug. See the table
and terminals on Page V12-T3-60. Extra current transformer
included for neutral. See accessories on Page V12-T3-65 for
remote ground fault trip indicator.
Description
Style Number
Provision to trip flux transfer shunt trip from external source
32 to 120 Vdc to 60 Hz 7
1371D72G22
240 to 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz 8
1371D72G32
Provision to trip flux transfer shunt trip from external source,
plus 1a-1b auxiliary switch
32 to 120 Vdc to 60 Hz 7
1371D72G15
4
240 to 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz 8
1371D72G25
Provision to trip flux transfer shunt trip from external 24 Vdc source
1370D85G01
5
1A-1B auxiliary switch
1371D72G03
■
Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products
and services. 1
Note: Available without extra CT for neutral. Order by description as
similar to above except without neutral CT or external CT terminal
connections at same price.
Note: Order two of the desired terminals for each pole of the breaker and
two for the neutral CT. The standard ground fault unit can also be used
without the neutral CT. MARK 75 frame color changed from gray to black
in mid-2002.
1
Field-Mountable Attachments 3456
Number
of Poles
Standard
(Long Delay,
Short Time and
Ground Fault Trip)
Long Delay,
Short Time, Adjustable
Short Delay Time and
Ground Fault Trip
Catalog Number
Ground Fault
Characteristics
Time
Setting
80–800
3.5–30 Cy
80–800
3.5-30 Cy
Types MCG and MCGA (400–800A) 2
3
MCG3800F
MCGA3800F
MARK 75 Types HMCG and HMCGA (400–800A) 2
3
HMCG3800F
HMCGA3800F
Breakers for Application at 100% Rating—Frame Only
Number
of Poles
Standard
(Long Delay,
Short Time and
Ground Fault Trip)
Catalog Number
Long Delay,
Short Time, Adjustable
Short Delay Time and
Ground Fault Trip
Catalog Number
Types MCCG and MCCGA (400–800A)
3
MCCG3800F
Ground Fault
Characteristics
Pickup
Setting
Amperes
Time
Setting
80–800
3.5–30 Cy
80–800
3.5–30 Cy
2
MCCGA3800F
HMCCG3800F
HMCCGA3800F
9
Type MC SELTRONIC breakers meet requirements for Class 21a,
and MARK 75. Type HMC meet Class 23a as defined by
Federal Spec. W-C-375b.
10
UL Listed Interrupting Capacity, rms Symmetrical Amperes 9
11
AC Volts
Breaker
240
480
600
MC, MCG
42,000
30,000
22,000
HMC, HMCG
65,000
50,000
25,000
12
13
14
Terminals
Terminals—Two Terminals Required Per Pole
MARK 75 Types HMCCG and HMCCGA (400–800A) 2
3
6
8
Rating Plugs
Select from the table on Page V12-T3-60.
For CSA, see Page V12-T3-48.
Pickup
Setting
Amperes
3
7
Additional Accessories and Modifications
Refer to Pages V12-T3-65–V12-T3-79.
Breakers for Standard Applications—Frame Only
2
Maximum Amperes
Number of Cables, Wire Range, Type
Catalog Number
Al/Cu Pressure Terminals
15
16
600
(2) #1–500 kcmil
TA700MA1 j
800 (std.)
(3) 3/0–400 kcmil
TA800MA2 j
800
(2) 500–750 kcmil
TA801MA j
17
18
Optional Copper Pressure Terminals
600
(2) 2/0–500 kcmil
T600MA1
800
(3) 3/0–300 kcmil
T800MA1
Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. Effective 2/1/02, only the MARK 75 version is available. For
replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.
2 For applications other than standard residual scheme, see Application Data 29-160.
3 Does not void listing of UL Listed breakers.
4 Only one of the attachments may be mounted per breaker.
5 For other possible combinations, refer to factory.
6 Molded-case switches do not use standard SELTRONIC attachments and should be ordered
by description.
7 Rated 48V minimum for ground fault applications requiring tripping at 55% of voltage.
8 Not for ground fault applications.
9 Interrupting capacities shown do not apply to molded-case switches.
j Type Al/Cu pressure terminal.
Also used on breakers with ground fault and on separately mounted neutral current
transformers. MARK 75 frame color changed from gray to black in mid-2002.
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
V12-T3-53
3
1
2
3
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
Types NC, NCA, NCG, NCGA, MARK 75 Type HNC, HNCA, HNCG, HNCGA SELTRONIC with Solid-State Trip Units, 600 Vac
Complete breaker requires frame and rating plug. See the table and terminals on Page V12-T3-60. Extra current transformer included
for neutral. See accessories on Page V12-T3-65 for remote ground fault trip indicator.
■
Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1
Type NC, NCA, MARK 75 Type HNC, HNCA SELTRONIC with Solid-State Trip Units, 600 Vac—Frame Only 2
NC: 600 Vac
Number
of Poles 3
4
Standard (Long Delay and Short Time)
Short Time Only 4
Long Delay, Short Time and Adjustable
Short Delay Time (0.08 –0.30 Seconds)
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
Types NC and NCA (800–1200A)
5
2
NC21200F
NC21200FM
NCA21200F
3
NC31200F
NC31200FM
NCA31200F
6
Mark 75 Types HNC and HNCA (800–1200A)
2
HNC21200F
HNC21200FM
HNCA21200F
7
3
HNC31200F
HNC31200FM
HNCA31200F
8
9
10
Types NCG, NCGA, and MARK 75 Types HNCG, HNCGA SELTRONIC with Built-In Ground Fault Protection
Complete breaker requires frame and rating plug. See the table and terminals on Page V12-T3-60. Extra current transformer included
for neutral. See accessories on Page V12-T3-65 for remote ground fault trip indicator.
Note: The standard ground fault unit above can also be used without the neutral CT. Order two of the desired terminals for each pole of the breaker and
two for the neutral CT.
Types NCG, NCGA and MARK 75 Type HNCG, HNCGA SELTRONIC with Built-In Ground Fault Protection—
Frame Only
11
Number
of Poles
12
Standard (Long Delay, Short Time
and Ground Fault Trip)
Long Delay, Short Time, Adjustable
Short Delay Time, and Ground Fault Trip
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
Pickup Setting
Amperes
Time Setting
NCGA31200F
120–1200
3.5–30 Cy
HNCGA31200F
120–1200
3.5–30 Cy
Types NCG and NCGA (800–1200A)
13
3
Ground Fault Characteristics
5
NCG31200F
MARK 75 Types HNCG and HNCGA (800–1200A) 5
14
3
HNCG31200F
Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. Effective 2/1/02, only the MARK 75 version is available. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on
Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.
2 Complete breaker requires frame and rating plug. See the table on Page V12-T3-60. For terminals, see the table on Page V12-T3-55.
3 Two-pole breakers are supplied in three-pole frames with current-carrying parts omitted from center pole.
4 UL Recognized component.
5 For applications other than standard residual scheme, see Application Data 29-160.
15
16
17
Type NC 1200A molded-case switch; refer to Page V12-T3-62. MARK 75 frame color changed from gray to black in mid-2002.
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T3-54
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
3
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
Types NC, NCA, NCG, NCGA, MARK 75 Type HNC, HNCA, HNCG,
HNCGA SELTRONIC with Solid-State Trip Units, 600 Vac
Accessories and Modifications
Field-Mountable Attachments—Left Handed
12345
Rating Plugs
Select from the table on Page V12-T3-60.
1
Terminals
2
Note: Two terminals required per pole.
Description
Style Number
Terminals 9
Provision to trip flux transfer shunt trip from external source
32 to 120 Vdc to 60 Hz 6
1372D39G13
Maximum
Amperes
240 to 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz 7
1372D39G23
Al/Cu Pressure Terminals
Provision to trip flux transfer shunt trip from external source,
plus a 1A-1B auxiliary switch
32 to 120 Vdc to 60 Hz 6
1372D39G16
Catalog
Number
1000
(3) 3/0–400 kcmil
TA1000NB1 j
1200 (std.)
(4) 4/0–500 kcmil
TA1200NB1 j
(3) 500–750 kcmil
TA1201NB1 j
6
7
1372D39G26
1200
Provision to trip flux transfer shunt trip from external 24 Vdc source
1371D94G05
Optional Copper Pressure Terminals
1A-1B auxiliary switch
1371D39G03
1000
(3) 3/0–500 kcmil
T1000NB1
24 Vdc shunt trip and 1A-1B auxiliary switch
1371D94G08
1200
(4) 3/0–400 kcmil
T1200NB1
240 to 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz
7
For CSA, see Page V12-T3-48.
UL Listed Interrupting Capacity, rms Symmetrical Amperes 8
AC Volts
Breaker
240
480
600
NC, NCG
42,000
30,000
22,000
HNC, HNCG
65,000
50,000
25,000
4
5
8
Additional Accessories and Modifications
Type NC SELTRONIC breakers meet requirements for Class 21a,
and MARK 75. Type HNC meet Class 23a as defined by Federal
Spec. W-C-375b.
3
Number of Cables,
Wire Range, Type
Refer to Pages V12-T3-65–V12-T3-79.
Note: MARK 75 frame color changed from gray to black in mid-2002.
Notes
1 For other possible combinations, refer to factory.
2 Molded-case switches do not use standard SELTRONIC attachments and should be ordered
by description.
3 Does not void listing of UL Listed breakers.
4 Only one of the attachments may be mounted per breaker.
5 Left pole mounting.
6 Rated 48V minimum for ground fault applications requiring tripping at 55% of voltage.
7 Not for ground fault applications.
8 Interrupting capacities shown do not apply to molded-case switches.
9 Also used on breakers with ground fault and on separately mounted neutral
current transformers.
j Type Al/Cu pressure terminal.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
V12-T3-55
3
1
2
3
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
Types PC, PCA, PCC, PCCA 2000, 2500 and 3000A SELTRONIC with Solid-State Trip Units, 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz
Complete breaker requires frame and rating plug. See the table on Page V12-T3-60 and rear connectors (connectors are included in
3000A and all front-connected frames.) Suitable for reverse-feed applications.
■
Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1
Breakers for Standard Applications—Frame Only
PC: 600 Vac
Number
of Poles 2
4
Standard (Long Delay and Short Time)
Short Time Only 3
Long Delay, Short Time Trip, and Adjustable
Short Delay Time (0.08 –0.30 seconds)
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
Type PC 2000, 1000 to 2000A
Rear-Connected Breakers
5
6
4
Type PCA 2000 4
Rear-Connected Breakers
2
PC22000F
PC22000FM
PCA22000F
3
PC32000F
PC32000FM
PCA32000F
Front-Connected Breakers
7
Front-Connected Breakers
2
PCF22000F
PCF22000FM
PCFA22000F
3
PCF32000F
PCF32000FM
PCFA32000F
Type PC 2500, 1400 to 2500A 4
Rear-Connected Breakers
8
9
Type PCA 2500 4
Rear-Connected Breakers
2
PC22500F
PC22500FM
PCA22500F
3
PC32500F
PC32500FM
PCA32500F
Front-Connected Breakers
10
Front-Connected Breakers
2
PCF22500F
PCF22500FM
PCFA22500F
3
PCF32500F
PCF32500FM
PCFA32500F
Type PC 3000, 1600 to 3000A 4
11
12
Type PCA 3000 4
2
PC23000F
PC23000FM
PCA23000F
3
PC33000F
PC33000FM
PCA33000F
Breakers for Standard Application at 100% Rating—Frame Only
13
Number
of Poles 2
14
Standard (Long Delay and Short Time)
Short Time Only 3
Long Delay, Short Time Trip, and Adjustable
Short Delay Time (0.08 –0.30 seconds)
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
Type PCC 2000, 1000 to 2000A
15
5—Rear-Connected
Breakers
2
PCC22000F
PCC22000FM
PCCA22000F
3
PCC32000F
PCC32000FM
PCCA32000F
Front Connected Breakers
16
17
2
PCCF22000F
PCCF22000FM
PCCFA22000F
3
PCCF32000F
PCCF32000FM
PCCFA32000F
Type PCC 2500, 1400 to 2500A
18
5—Rear-Connected
Breakers
2
PCC22500F
PCC22500FM
PCCA22500F
3
PCC32500F
PCC32500FM
PCCA32500F
Front-Connected Breakers
19
2
PCCF22500F
PCCF22500FM
PCCFA22500F
3
PCCF32500F
PCCF32500FM
PCCFA32500F
20
Type PC 3000, 1600 to 3000A 5
2
PCC23000F
PCC23000FM
PCCA23000F
21
3
PCC33000F
PCC33000FM
PCCA33000F
Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.
2 Two-pole breakers are supplied in three-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from center pole.
3 UL Recognized component.
4 UL Listed for standard applications.
5 These breakers are UL Listed for application at 100% of rating per NEC exceptions when used in a properly ventilated and listed enclosure.
22
23
24
25
V12-T3-56
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
3
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
Accessories and
Modifications
Drawout Mounting Breakers,
Three-Pole Only
Breaker frame and complete
drawout frame with safety
tripping interlock.
Order by description.
Secondary contacts supplied
as required at no extra
charge. Order required rating
plug separately. Refer to
Page V12-T3-79.
Note: Includes breakers without
adjustable short delay time.
Rating Plugs
Select from the table on
Page V12-T3-60.
Stationary portion of drawout
frame only for future breaker
installations, three-pole only.
Refer to Page V12-T3-79.
Special Type PCC Breakers for
SCR Power Supplies
These drawout mounting
breakers are designed with
a 2 to 4 times magnetic trip
adjustment and special time
delay trip characteristics to
provide maximum protection
and coordination with SCR
power supplies on offshore
drilling rigs. Suitable for
application at 100% of rating.
Order by description.
Secondary contacts supplied
as required. Order standard
rating plugs separately.
UL Listed Interrupting Capacity rms Symmetrical Amperes
(Standard and Ground Fault Breakers) 1
1
AC Volts
Breaker
240
480
600
PC, PCC
125,000
100,000
100,000
2
3
Note
1 Interrupting capacities shown do not apply to molded-case switches.
4
Additional Accessories
and Modifications
5
Refer to Pages V12-T3-65–
V12-T3-79.
6
7
Availability: PCC2000,
PCC2500 drawout-mounting
breakers.
8
Type PC and PCC meet
requirements of Class 25a
as defined in Federal Spec.
W-C-375b.
9
10
For CSA, see
Page V12-T3-48.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
V12-T3-57
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
Types PCG, PCGA, PCCG,
PCCGA SELTRONIC with
Built-In Ground Fault
Protection Includes Extra
Current Transformer for
Neutral (Optional Remote
Ground Fault Trip Indicator
Kit, Page V12-T3-65)
Complete breaker requires
frame and rating plug. See the
table on Page V12-T3-60 and
rear connectors (except frontconnected frames and 3000A
frames include connectors).
■
Shaded area denotes
obsolete or discontinued
products and services.
Note: Available without
extra CT for neutral. Order
by description as similar to
above except without neutral
CT or external CT terminal
connections at same price.
Older catalog numbers:
PCFGX—”X” means without
fourth CT.
Note: The standard ground fault
unit listed can also be used
without the neutral CT.
Breakers for Standard Application—Frame Only
Number
of Poles
Standard (Long Delay,
Short Time and Ground Fault Trip)
Long Delay, Short Time, Ground Fault
Trip, and Adjustable Short Delay Time
(0.08 –0.30 Seconds)
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
Ground Fault Characteristics
Pickup
Setting
Time
Setting
Type PCG 2000 12—Rear-Connected Breakers
Type PCGA 2000 12 1000 to 2000A 2—Rear-Connected Breakers
3
PCGA32000F
200–1200
3.5–30 cycles
PCFGA32000F
200–1200
3.5–30 cycles
PCG32000F
Front-Connected Breakers
3
PCFG32000F
Type PCG 2500 12—Rear-Connected Breakers
Type PCGA 2500 12 1400 to 2500A 2—Rear-Connected Breakers
3
PCGA32500F
240–1200
3.5–30 cycles
PCFGA32500F
240–1200
3.5–30 cycles
300–1200
3.5–30 cycles
PCG32500F
Front-Connected Breakers
3
PCFG32500F
Type PCG 3000 12
Type PCGA 3000 12 1600 to 3000A 2
3
PCGA33000F
PCG33000F
Breakers for Application at 100% Rating—Frame Only
Number
of Poles
Standard (Long Delay,
Short Time and Ground Fault Trip)
Long Delay, Short Time, Ground Fault
Trip, and Adjustable Short Delay Time
(0.08 –0.30 Seconds)
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
Ground Fault
Characteristics
Pickup
Setting
Time
Setting
Type PCCG 2000 3—Rear-Connected Breakers
Type PCCGA 2000 3 1000 to 2000A 2—Rear-Connected Breakers
3
PCCGA32000F
200–1200
3.5–30 cycles
PCCFGA32000F
200–1200
3.5–30 cycles
PCCG32000F
Front-Connected Breakers
3
PCCFG32000F
Type PCCG 2500 3—Rear-Connected Breakers
Type PCCGA 2500 3 1400 to 2500A 2—Rear-Connected Breakers
3
PCCGA32500F
240–1200
3.5–30 cycles
PCCFGA32500F
240–1200
3.5–30 cycles
300–1200
3.5–30 cycles
PCCG32500F
13
Front-Connected Breakers
14
Type PCCG 3000 3
Type PCCGA 3000 3 1600 to 3000A 2
3
PCCGA33000F
15
Notes
1 UL Listed for standard applications.
2 For application other than standard residual schemes, refer to Application Data 29-160.
3 These breakers are UL Listed for application at 100% of rating per NEC exceptions when used in a properly ventilated and listed enclosure.
3
16
PCCFG32500F
PCCG33000F
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T3-58
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
3
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
Types PCG, PCGA, PCCG, PCCGA SELTRONIC with Built-In
Ground Fault Protection Accessories and Modifications
PC breakers are not UL Listed.
Field-Mountable Attachments 123
Busbar Connections
“T” Connector
Description
Style Number
Provision to trip flux transfer shunt trip from external source
32 to 120 Vdc to 60 Hz 4
1372D35G22
240 to 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz 5
1372D35G32
Provision to trip flux transfer shunt trip from external source
plus 1A-1B auxiliary switch
32 to 120 Vdc to 60 Hz 4
1372D35G15
240 to 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz 5
1372D35G25
2A-2B auxiliary switch
1372D35G18
Provision to trip flux transfer shunt trip from external 24 Vdc source
1371D95G01
1A-1B auxiliary switch
1372D35G03
1A-1B auxiliary switch and 24 Vdc shunt trip
1371D95G04
2A-2B auxiliary switch and 24 Vdc shunt trip
1371D95G07
3A-3B auxiliary switch and 24 Vdc shunt trip
1371D95G10
1
Busbar Connections—“T” Connector
(For Cu/AI Bus)
Catalog Number
3
BA2000PB
4
Two required per pole. For rear bus connection of breakers
through 2000A. Accepts up to four bus bolts. May be rotated 90°.
5
Note: Shipped separately from breaker.
6
“C” Connector
“C” Connector (For Cu/AI Bus)
Breaker Amperes
Catalog Number
2500
BA2500PB
Two required per pole. For rear bus connection of
2500A breakers.
Rear Bus Connectors
Cable Connector
Connector Style/Catalog Number
PC2000 7, PCC2000 7
BA2000PB
PC2500 7, PCC2500 7
BA2500PB
PC3000, PCC3000
Included in frame
Racking Crank for
Drawout Frames
To engage or withdraw
the moving portion of
the drawout. A standard
0.50-inch hex socket with
extension can be used for
this purpose.
Racking Crank
Style Number
7
8
Rear Bus Connectors
Two required per pole. Fixed mounting breakers.
Breaker Frame 6
2
9
10
Cable Connector
Catalog Number
11
505C706G04
12
Cell Switches Mounted on
Drawout Frames, All Ratings
A maximum of four switches
can be provided. Order by
description. Each switch
provides a NO and NC
contact that transfers before
reaching the test position
when being withdrawn, and
after the test position when
being racked in.
Fits “T” Connector and 2000A front-connected breakers.
Accepts four 400–600 kcmil copper cables.
13
Notes
1 For other possible combinations, contact your local Eaton Field Sales office.
2 Only one of these attachments may be mounted per breaker.
3 Left pole mounting.
4 Rated 48V minimum for ground fault applications.
5 Not for ground fault applications.
6 Also apply to equivalent ratings of PCG and PCCG ground fault breakers.
7 Not required for front-connected frames.
14
15
16
17
765A767G01
18
19
Approximate Shipping Weights, PC and PCC Breakers
(Three-Pole)
Breaker
Rating
PC, PCC
PCF, PCCF
PCG, PCCG
PCFG, PCCFG
2000
136 lbs
163 lbs
160 lbs
185 lbs
2500
145 lbs
175 lbs
170 lbs
200 lbs
3000
220 lbs
—
245 lbs
—
20
21
22
23
24
25
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
V12-T3-59
3
1
2
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
SELTRONIC Rating Plug Selection Data
Rating plugs listed below are for both standard breakers and breakers with built-in ground fault protection.
Rating Plug Selection Data
Rating Plugs Only (For Two- or Three-Pole Frames)
Rating Plugs Only (For Two- or Three-Pole Frames)
3
4
5
6
Continuous
Ampere
Rating 1
Magnetic Trip
Setting, Amperes
Fixed
Rating Plugs
Adjustable
Rating Plugs 23
Low
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
High
Continuous
Ampere
Rating 1
Magnetic Trip
Setting, Amperes
Fixed
Rating Plugs
Adjustable
Rating Plugs 23
Low
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
High
For 150A Frames: LC, LCA, LCG, LCGA, HLC, HLCA, HLCG, HLCGA
For 1200A Frames: NC, NCA, NCG, NCGA, HNC, HNCA, HNCG, HNCGA
75
225
750
1LC75
—
800
1600
6400
12NC800
A12NC800 4
90
270
900
1LC90
—
900
1800
7200
12NC900
A12NC900
100
300
1000
1LC100
A1LC100 4
1000
2000
8000
12NC1000
A12NC1000
125
375
1250
1LC125
A1LC125
1200
2400
9600
12NC1200
A12NC1200 5
150
450
1500
1LC150
A1LC150 5
For 2000A Frames: PC, PCA, PCC, PCCA, PCG, PCGA, PCCG, PCCGA
7
For 300A Frames: LC, LCA, LCG, LCGA, HLC, HLCA, HLCA, HLCG, HLCGA
1000
2000
8000
20PC1000
—
150
450
1500
3LC150
—
1200
2400
9600
20PC1200
—
8
175
525
1750
3LC175
—
1400
2800
11,200
20PC1400
—
200
600
2000
3LC200
—
1600
3200
12,800
20PC1600
A20PC1600
9
225
675
2250
3LC225
A3LC225
1800
3600
14,400
20PC1800
A20PC1800
250
750
2500
3LC250
A3LC250
2000
4000
16,000
20PC2000
A20PC2000 5
10
275
825
2750
3LC275
A3LC275
For 2500A Frames: PC, PCA, PCC, PCCA, PCG, PCGA, PCCG, PCCGA
300
900
3000
3LC300
A3LC300 5
1400
2800
11,200
25PC1400
—
11
For 400A Frames: LC, LCA, LCG, LCGA, HLC, HLCA, HLCG, HLCGA
1600
3200
12,800
25PC1600
—
200
600
2000
4LC200
—
1800
3600
14,400
25PC1800
A25PC1800
12
225
675
2250
4LC225
—
2000
4000
16,000
25PC2000
A25PC2000
250
750
2500
4LC250
—
2500
5000
20,000
25PC2500
A25PC2500 5
13
300
900
3000
4LC300
A4LC300
For 3000A Frames: PC, PCA, PCC, PCCA, PCG, PCGA, PCCG, PCCGA
350
1050
3500
4LC350
A4LC350
1600
3200
12,800
30PC1600
—
400
1200
4000
4LC400
A4LC400 5
1800
3600
14,400
30PC1800
—
2000
4000
16,000
30PC2000
—
2500
5000
20,000
30PC2500
A30PC2500
3000
6000
24,000
30PC3000
A30PC3000 5
14
15
For 600A Frames: LC, LCA, LCG, LCGA, HLC, HLCA, HLCG, HLCGA, LCC,
LCCA, HLCC, HLCCA, LCCG, LCCGA, HLCCG, HLCCGA
300
900
3000
6LC300
—
350
1050
3500
6LC350
—
16
400
1200
4000
6LC400
A6LC400 4
450
1350
4500
6LC450
A6LC450
17
500
1500
5000
6LC500
A6LC500
600
1800
6000
6LC600
A6LC600 5
18
19
20
For 800A Frames: MC, MCA, MCG, MCGA, HMC, HMCA, HMCG, HMCGA,
MCC, MCCA, HMCC, HMCCA, MCCG, MCCGA, HMCCG, HMCCGA, MDS
400
1200
4000
8MC400
—
500
1500
5000
8MC500
A8MC500 6
600
1800
6000
8MC600
A8MC600
700
2100
7000
8MC700
A8MC700
800
2400
8000
8MC800
A8MC800 5
21
Notes
1 Ampere rating when used in short time only frames:
LC-150: 150A
MC-800: 800A
PC-3000: 3000A
LC-300: 300A
NC-1200: 1200A
LCL-250: 250A
LC-400: 400A
PC-2000: 2000A
LCL-400: 400A
LC-600: 600A
PC-2500: 2500A
2 Magnetic trip range of adjustable rating plugs:
LC, HLC, MC, HMC:
3 to 10 times ampere setting
NC, HNC, PC, PCC, LCL-400: 2 to 8 times ampere setting
LCL-250:
3 to 9 times ampere setting
3 Adjustable 70 to 100% except as noted.
4 Adjustable 75 to 100%.
5 Adjustable 50 to 100%.
6 Adjustable 80 to 100%.
Contact Avery Creek, NC, Technical Resource Center for old style (three prong) ground fault
rating plugs.
22
23
24
25
V12-T3-60
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
3
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
Molded-Case Switches
1
Molded-case switches are UL Listed devices and are available
only as high magnetic trip type with fixed trip setting.
2
■
Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued
products and services. 1
Molded-Case Switches with High Magnetic Trip
(Fixed Trip Setting)
Number
of Poles
Maximum
Volts
Maximum
Amperes
Molded-Case Switch Terminal Data
Switch
Catalog Number 23
MCS
Type
Maximum
Switch
Amperes
Wire
Type
Number
of Wires
Wire
Range
Terminal Type
or Catalog
Number
2
240
400
DA2400WK
Standard Terminals
3
240
400
DA3400WK
DA, LB, LBB
400
Cu only
2
3/0–250 kcmil
T400DA2
1
120
100
EB1100LK
EB, EHB, FB
100
Cu
1
#14–1/0
Pressure
2
240
100
EB2100LK
FB
150
Cu/Al
1
#4–4/0
Pressure
3
240
100
EB3100LK
JA, KA
225
Cu/Al
1
#4–350 kcmil
TA225LA1
3
240
100
EB3100SLK
JB, KB
Cu/Al
1
#4–350 kcmil
TA250KB
1
277
100
EHB1100LK
2
480
100
EHB2100LK
3
480
100
EHB3100LK
3
480
100
EHB3100SLK
2
600
100
FB2100LK
2
600
150
FB2150LK
250
Optional Terminals
3
4
5
6
7
8
DA, LB, LBB
400
—
—
—
—
EB, EHB, FB
100
Cu/Al
1
#4–4/0
Pressure
FB
150
—
—
—
—
JA, KA
225
Cu
1
#6–350 kcmil
T225LA
JB, KB
250
Cu
1
#4–350 kcmil
T250KB
9
10
3
600
100
FB3100LK
3
600
150
FB3150LK
3
600
150
FB3150SLK
4
277/480
100
FB4100LK
4
277/480
150
FB4150LK
Frame
Rating
Trip Setting
(Amperes)
Tolerance
(%)
12
EB
100
1000
±20
13
11
Molded-Case Switches with High Magnetic Trip—
Trip Setting and Tolerance
2
600
225
JA2225WK
2
600
225
JA2225WSK
EHB/FB
100
1200
±20
150
1500
±20
3
600
225
JA3225WK
FB
3
600
225
JA3225WSK
DA/LB/LBB
400
4000
+10
–0
2
600
250
JB2250WK
JA/KA
225
2250
2
600
250
JB2250WSK
+10
–0
15
3
600
250
JB3250WK
JB/KB
250
2500
3
600
250
JB3250WSK
+10
–0
16
2
600
225
KA2225WK
2
600
225
KA2225WSK
3
600
225
KA3225WK
3
600
225
KA3225WSK
2
600
250
KB2250WK
2
600
250
KB2250WSK
3
600
250
KB3250WK
3
600
250
KB3250WSK
2
600
400
LB2400WK
2
600
400
LB2400WSK
3
600
400
LB3400WK
3
600
400
LB3400WSK
2
600
400
LBB2400WK
2
600
400
LBB2400WSK
3
600
400
LBB3400WK
3
600
400
LBB3400WSK
14
Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference
on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.
2 Catalog number suffix identification:
K = Molded-case switch with high magnetic trip (fixed trip setting)
S = Saf-T-Vue cover
L = With line and load terminals
W = No terminals
3 Molded-case switch dimensions are the same as the equivalent thermal-magnetic breaker.
Refer to Dimension Sheet 29-171.
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
V12-T3-61
3
1
2
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
■
Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1
Molded-Case Switches with High Magnetic Trip
Molded-Case Switch Terminal Data
(Fixed Trip Setting)
Number
of Poles
Maximum
Volts
Maximum
Amperes
Switch
Catalog Number 23
CA2225KW
MCS
Type
Maximum
Switch
Amperes
Wire
Range
Terminal
Type or
Wire Number Catalog
Type of Wires Number
3
2
240
225
3
240
225
CA3225KW
Standard Terminals (Aluminum Body)
4
2
600
400
LA2400WK
CA
225
#1–300 kcmil
Cu/Al 1
TA225CA2
2
600
400
LA2400WSK
LA400, LAB
400
Cu/Al 1
TA400LA1
2
600
600
LA2600WK
#4–250 kcmil,
plus 3/0–600 kcmil
2
600
600
LA2600WSK
LA600, LC600
600
250/500 kcmil
Cu/Al 2
TA600LA
3
600
400
LA3400WK
MC, MA
800
3/0–400 kcmil
Cu/Al 3
TA800MA2
3
600
400
LA3400WSK
NC, NB
1200
4/0–500 kcmil
Cu/Al 4
TA1200NB1
3
600
400
LA3600WK
NC, NB
1200
—
—
—
3
600
400
LA3600WSK
PC2000, PCC2000
2000
BA2000PB rear bus connector
2
600
400
LAB2400WK
2
600
400
LAB2400WSK
5
6
7
—
PC2500, PCC2500
2500
BA2500PB rear bus connector
PC3000, PCC3000
3000
Rear bus connector included in frame
8
3
600
400
LAB3400WK
3
600
400
LAB3400WSK
Optional Terminals
9
2
600
600
LC2600WK 4
CA
225
—
—
—
—
3
600
600
LC3600WK 4
LA400, LAB
400
Cu
1
T401LA
2
600
600
LCC2600WK 4
#4–250 kcmil,
plus 3/0–600 kcmil
3
600
600
LCC3600WK 4
LA600, LC600
600
250/500 kcmil
Cu
2
T600LA
2
600
800
MA2800WK
MC, MA
800
3/0–300 kcmil
Cu
3
T800MA1
11
2
600
800
MA2800WSK
NC, NB
1200
3/0–400 kcmil
Cu
4
T1200NB1
3
600
800
MA3800WK
Cu/Al 3
12
3
600
800
MA3800WSK
2
600
800
MC2800WK 4
3
600
800
MC3800WK 4
10
13
4
2
600
800
MCC2800WK
3
600
800
MCC3800WK 4
2
600
1200
NB21200WK
2
600
1200
NB21200WSK
3
600
1200
NB31200WK
3
600
1200
NB31200WSK
2
600
1200
NC21200WK 4
16
3
600
1200
NC31200WK 4
2
600
2000
PB22000WK
17
2
600
2500
PB22500WK
3
600
2000
PB32000WK
3
600
2500
PB32500WK
2
600
2000
PBF22000K
14
15
18
3
600
2000
PBF32000WK
19
25
600
2000
PC22000WK
25
600
2500
PC22500WK
20
25
600
3000
PC23000K
35
600
2000
PC32000WK
35
600
2500
PC32500WK
21
22
23
24
35
600
3000
PC33000K
25
600
2000
PCC22000WK
25
600
2500
PCC22500WK
25
600
3000
PCC23000K
35
600
2000
PCC32000WK
35
600
2500
PCC32500WK
35
600
3000
PCC33000K
25
600
2000
PCF22000K
35
600
2000
PCF32000K
NC, NB
1200
500–750 kcmil
PC2000, PCC2000
2000
BA2000PB rear bus connector
TA1201NB1
PC2500, PCC2500
2500
BA2500PB rear bus connector
PC3000, PCC3000
3000
Rear bus connector included in frame
Molded-Case Switches With High Magnetic Trip—
Trip Setting and Tolerance
Frame
Rating
Trip Setting
(Amperes)
Tolerance
(%)
CA
225
2250
+20
–10
LA (400)
400
4000
+10
–0
LA/LC
600
6000
+10
–0
MA/MC
800
8000
+10
–0
NB/NC
1200
12,000
+10
–0
PB/PC
2000–3000
12,000
+10
–0
Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference
on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167.
2 Catalog number suffix identification:
K = Molded-case switch with high magnetic trip (fixed trip setting)
S = Saf-T-Vue cover
W = No terminals
3 Molded-case switch dimensions are the same as the equivalent thermal-magnetic breaker.
Refer to Dimension Sheet 29-171.
4 For molded-case switch types LC, LCC—use LA attachments;
MC and MCC—use MA attachments; NC—use NB attachments.
5 For molded-case switch types PC, PCC and PCF, rating plug is included and use SELTRONIC
PC attachments.
25
V12-T3-62
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
3
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
Type MCP Motor
Circuit Protector
The motor circuit protector
(MCP) is designed specifically
for the protection of motor
circuits. It operates on the
magnetic principle with a
current sensing coil in each of
the three poles, with the trippoint adjustable from the front.
MCPs are the fastest devices
available for clearing low level
faults and offer circuit breaker
features and convenience—
resettable, quick-make
quick-break, deadfront
and protection against
single phasing.
Terminals
Sizes 0–4 MCP with
Current Limiter
Note: Sizes 0–4 only.
Terminals
Terminals are included
with both the MCP and the
current limiter. Standard
terminals are aluminum alloy,
with non-aluminum terminals
optional for use with only
the MCP. Both standard
and optional terminals will
accommodate aluminum
or copper conductors.
Note: Except 400A Size 5.
Non-aluminum terminal suitable
for copper only.
When using aluminum
conductors, use of joint
compound is recommended.
Wire ranges are listed in the
terminal table above.
Standard Aluminum
Optional Non-Aluminum
Size 0, 1, 2
#14–#4
#14–1/0
Size 3
#6–3/0
#14–1/0
Size 4
#4–4/0
#4–4/0
Size 5 (250)
#4–350 kcmil
#4–350 kcmil
Size 5 (400)
—
(2) 3/0–250 kcmil
Limiters to 50
#14–#2
—
Limiters to 100
#1–4/0
—
Limiters to 150
#1–4/0
—
2
3
4
5
6
Motor Circuit Protectors
■ Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products
and services. 1
Size 5 MCP 532500
MCPs are rated to correspond
to NEMA starter size.
Current Limiter Attachment
The EL current limiter is an
attachment that bolts to
the load end of the MCP to
provide increased interrupting
capacity. The combination is
UL Listed as a recognized
component for application at
up to 200,000A symmetrical
at 600 Vac. It is coordinated
with the MCP so that normal
short circuits will be cleared
automatically by the MCP,
opening all three poles, and
only the rare high fault will
cause the limiter to function.
Current limiters must be
applied as shown in the
terminal table above.
1
Terminals
MCP or Limiter
(Amperes)
7
Starter
Size
Trip
Range,
Amperes
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
With Standard Aluminum
Alloy Terminals
Catalog Number
With Optional
Non-Aluminum Terminals 2
Catalog Number
0
7–22
3
MCP0322R
MCP0322CR
0
18–58
7
MCP0358R
MCP0358CR
0
50–150
15
MCP03150R
MCP03150CR
1
100–300
30
MCP13300R
MCP13300CR
2
160–480
50
MCP23480R
MCP23480CR
3
275–1000
100
MCP331000R
MCP331000CR
4
450–1550
150
MCP431550R
MCP431550CR
4
575–1800
150
MCP431800R
MCP431800CR
5
1250–2500
250
MCP532500
MCP532500C
5
2000–4000
400
—
MCP534000C
UL Listed
The MCP is UL Listed as a
recognized component and
requires additional listing by
the control manufacturer in
combination with a contactor
and overload relay.
Accessories for MCP
For
MCP Size
Use
Accessories For
Sizes 0–4
FB
5 (250A)
KB
5 (400A)
LB
9
10
11
12
13
Base Mounting Hardware
No charge when ordered
with MCP. Order separately
when required.
14
Base Mounting Hardware
16
Description
Style Number
Current Limiters
Sizes 0–4
21C6782G18
Limiter Catalog
Numbers
For MCP Catalog
Numbers 7
Size 5 (250A)
673B125G12
Size 5 (400A)
21C6782G22
EL3003R
MCP0322R
Modifications for MCP 3
EL3007R
MCP0358R
Description
EL3015R
MCP03150R
EL3030R
MCP13300R
EL3050R
MCP23480R
EL3100R
MCP331000R
EL3150R
MCP431550R
EL3150R
MCP431800R
Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For
replacement solutions, see the crossreference on Pages V12-T3-114–
V12-T3-167.
2 Catalog numbers ending in CR were
previously listed ending in RC. This
is a catalog number change only, not
a material change.
3 Not UL Listed.
4 Mounts only in right pole; only one
Modification marked can be used in
MCP (Sizes 0–4).
5 On 400A Size 5, an external resistor is
supplied for voltages above 240 Vac
and 24 Vdc.
6 On Sizes 0–4 and 250A Size 5, an
external resistor is supplied for customer
mounting, except for 120 Vac, 12, 24,
125 Vdc.
7 Also applicable to MCPs with
optional terminals.
Modifications for MCP
These modifications must be
factory installed. Consult
factory for pricing.
Auxiliary switches
2As and 2Bs
4—1A
and 1B,
Shunt trip 4
Undervoltage release 456
Moisture-fungus treatment
Accessories for MCP
For handle mechanisms
refer to Pages V12-T3-95–
V12-T3-112.
Note: On 400A Size 5, an external
resistor is supplied for voltages,
above 240 Vac and 24 Vdc.
Interrupting Ratings
Maximum application current
shall be determined by testing
the MCP in combination with
a contactor and overload relay.
Additional capacity can be
obtained by using the current
limiter attachment.
8
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
V12-T3-63
15
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
3
1
2
3
4
5
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
Series C 30 mA Ground Fault
(Earth Leakage)
Series C 30 mA Ground
Fault (Earth Leakage)
Earth Leakage
The Series C units (prefix only
listed below) that included a
breaker and integral Earth
Leakage module have been
replaced by the Series G
solution that has the flexibility
to add the Earth Leakage
module in the field. The
Series G solution has an
extended range of 15–630A.
Ampere Range—15–400A
Ampere
Rating
Series C
Four-Pole
Series G
MCCB
Series G
MCCB
Alt
Series G Earth
Leakage Module
15
EL4FD3015L
EGS4015FFG
EGC4015FFG
ELEBN4125G
20
EL4FD3020L
EGS4020FFG
EGC4020FFG
ELEBN4125G
25
EL4FD3025L
EGS4025FFG
EGC4025FFG
ELEBN4125G
EL4HFD
30
EL4FD3030L
EGS4030FFG
EGC4030FFG
ELEBN4125G
ELHFD
EL4HFW
35
EL4FD3035L
EGS4035FFG
EGC4035FFG
ELEBN4125G
ELHFW
EL4HJW
40
EL4FD3040L
EGS4040FFG
EGC4040FFG
ELEBN4125G
EL4HKW
45
EL4FD3045L
EGS4045FFG
EGC4045FFG
ELEBN4125G
EL4JW
50
EL4FD3050L
EGS4050FFG
EGC4050FFG
ELEBN4125G
Catalog Prefix
Three-Pole
ELFD
ELFW
ELHMCP
ELHJD
Four-Pole
EL4FD
EL4FW
6
ELHJW
ELHKD
EL4KW
60
EL4FD3060L
EGS4060FFG
EGC4060FFG
ELEBN4125G
7
ELHKW
—
70
EL4FD3070L
EGS4070FFG
EGC4070FFG
ELEBN4125G
ELJD
—
80
EL4FD3080L
EGS4080FFG
EGC4080FFG
ELEBN4125G
8
ELJW
—
90
EL4FD3090L
EGS4090FFG
EGC4090FFG
ELEBN4125G
ELKD
—
100
EL4FD3100L
EGS4100FFG
EGC4100FFG
ELEBN4125G
9
ELKW
—
110
EL4FD3110L
EGS4110FFG
EGC4110FFG
ELEBN4125G
125
EL4FD3125L
EGS4125FFG
EGC4125FFG
ELEBN4125G
150
EL4FD3150L
JGE4150FAG
JGC4150FAG
ELJBN4150W
50
EL4FW3050JL
GES4050AFM
—
ELEBE4125G
11
50
EL4FWC3050JL
GEC4050AFM
—
ELEBE4125G
15
EL4HFD3015L
EGH4015FFG
—
ELEBN4125G
12
20
EL4HFD3020L
EGH4020FFG
—
ELEBN4125G
25
EL4HFD3025L
EGH4025FFG
—
ELEBN4125G
13
30
EL4HFD3030L
EGH4030FFG
—
ELEBN4125G
35
EL4HFD3035L
EGH4035FFG
—
ELEBN4125G
14
40
EL4HFD3040L
EGH4040FFG
—
ELEBN4125G
45
EL4HFD3045L
EGH4045FFG
—
ELEBN4125G
15
50
EL4HFD3050L
EGH4050FFG
—
ELEBN4125G
60
EL4HFD3060L
EGH4060FFG
—
ELEBN4125G
16
70
EL4HFD3070L
EGH4070FFG
—
ELEBN4125G
80
EL4HFD3080L
EGH4080FFG
—
ELEBN4125G
17
90
EL4HFD3090L
EGH4090FFG
—
ELEBN4125G
100
EL4HFD3100L
EGH4100FFG
—
ELEBN4125G
18
110
EL4HFD3110L
EGH4110FFG
—
ELEBN4125G
125
EL4HFD3125L
EGH4125FFG
—
ELEBN4125G
19
150
EL4HFD3150L
JGH3150FAG
—
ELJBN4150W
Note: Please contact Eaton
customer service for assistance
with crossing from the obsolete
product to the new Series G.
10
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T3-64
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
Portable Test Kit and Remote
Ground Fault Trip Indicator
Remote Ground Fault
Trip Indicator
3
Face Mounting Bracket
1
Portable Test Kit
2
3
4
Provides verification of
performance of all frame
sizes of SELTRONIC breakers
while devices are still in
service under varying load
and/or phase unbalance.
The tester operates on
120V, 50/60 Hz, and includes
complete instructions and
test times for testing the long
time, instantaneous operation
and optional ground fault
operation of the breaker.
Portable Test Kit
Style Number
STK2
For use only with SELTRONIC
circuit breakers (LCG, HLCG,
MCG, HMCG, NCG, HNCG,
PCG and PCCG) with built-in
ground fault protection.
Face Mounting Bracket for
Ground Fault Indicator
5
Style Number
6
1264C67G01
Note: UL Listed as a recognized
component.
7
The SELTRONIC ground fault
indicator is a remotely
mounted device with a
combination indicating light/
reset/test button that will
light when the breaker trips
on a ground fault. Tripping
from overloads or short
circuits will not activate the
device. A separate 120V,
50/60 Hz power source is
required to power the light
and internal relay, which
has 1NO/1NC contacts
for customer connected
alarm, etc. Designed for
panel mounting, it can be
face-mounted by ordering
the optional mounting
bracket below.
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Remote Ground
Fault Indicator
Style Number
Catalog Number
1259C14G01
GFAU
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
V12-T3-65
3
1
2
3
4
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
Accessories
Rear-Connected Studs
For complete stud assembly,
order a stud and an
appropriate tube based on
thickness of customer’s
Rear Connected Stud
mounting panel. A short stud
must be assembled adjacent
to a long stud to maintain
clearances required by
Underwriters Laboratories.
400A LA studs of the
same length have sufficient
clearance; however, customer
connections may make it
necessary to use a short stud
adjacent to a long stud. Two
studs are required per pole.
Refer to DS29171 Dimension
Sheets for stud sizes and
extensions behind breaker.
For DA, EB, EHB, FB, JA, KA, JB, KB, LB, LBB, HFB, HKA, HKB and HLB Breakers 1
Mounting Panel
Thickness, Inches
Stud 2
Length
Tube 3
Style Number
Length
Style Number
5
DA, LB, LBB and HLB Breakers
3/4–1
Short
656D565G03
27/32
313C909H17
6
3/4–1
Long
656D565G04
3-25/32
313C909H20
1/2–3/4
Short
656D565G03
1-3/32
313C909H18
7
1/2–3/4
Long
656D565G04
4-1/32
313C909H21
1/4–1/2
Short
656D565G03
1-11/32
313C909H19
1/4–1/2
Long
656D565G04
4-9/32
313C909H22
8
EB, EHB, FB and HFB (100A Maximum)
9
1
Short
451D874G01
1-1/16
32B9446H20
1
Long
451D874G02
3-7/16
32B9446H24
10
1-1/16–15/16
Short
451D874G01
1-3/8
32B9446H21
1-1/16–15/16
Long
451D874G02
3-3/4
32B9446H25
11
3/8–5/8
Short
451D874G01
1-11/16
32B9446H22
3/8–5/8
Long
451D874G02
4-1/16
32B9446H26
1/4–5/16
Short
451D874G01
2
32B9446H23
1/4–5/16
Long
451D874G02
4-3/8
32B9446H27
12
FB, HFB 150 Ampere Breakers
13
1
Short
374D883G01
1-1/16
374D883H06
14
1
Long
374D883G02
4-5/16
374D883H10
11/16–15/16
Short
374D883G01
1-3/8
374D883H07
15
11/16–15/16
Long
374D883G02
4-5/8
374D883H11
3/8–5/8
Short
374D883G01
1-11/16
374D883H08
3/8–5/8
Long
374D883G02
4-15/16
374D883H12
16
1/4–5/16
Short
374D883G01
2
374D883H09
1/4–5/16
Long
374D883G02
5-1/4
374D883H13
17
JA, KA and HKA Breakers
3/4–1
Short
656D565G01
27/32
456D983H05
18
3/4–1
Long
656D565G02
3-25/32
456D983H08
1/2–3/4
Short
656D565G01
1-3/32
456D983H06
19
1/2–3/4
Long
656D565G02
4-1/32
456D983H09
1/4 –1/2
Short
656D565G01
1-11/32
456D983H07
20
1/4 –1/2
Long
656D565G02
4-9/32
456D983H10
JB, KB and HKB Breakers
21
3/4–1
Short
5010D23G01
27/32
456D983H05
3/4–1
Long
5010D23G02
3-7/8
5010D23H05
1/2–3/4
Short
5010D23G01
1-3/32
456D983H06
22
23
1/2–3/4
Long
5010D23G02
4-1/8
5010D23H06
1/4 –1/2
Short
5010D23G01
1-11/32
456D983H07
1/4 –1/2
Long
5010D23G02
4-3/8
5010D23H07
Notes
1 For insulated panels only; two required per pole.
2 Not UL Listed.
3 Included at no charge when ordered with stud.
24
25
V12-T3-66
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
3
For LAB, LA, MA, HLA, HMA and HNB Breakers 1
Stud Ampere
Rating
Diameter, Inches
and Thread
Extension Back
of Breaker, Inches
Stud
Style Number
3-7/32
1241 345
1
2
LAB, LA, HLA, LC and HLC Breakers
225 2
1/2–13
225 2
1/2–13
6-9/32
1241 346
225 23
1/2–13
4-31/32
1241 392
400 2
3/4–16
5-15/32
5B7383G15
400 2
3/4–16
7-31/32
5B7383G16
400 2
3/4–16
10-15/32
5B7383G17
600 4
1–12
5-29/32
314C960G07
600 4
1–12
5-13/32
314C960G08
600 4
1–12
5-29/32
314C960G09
6
7
3
4
5
MA, HMA, MC, HMC, MD and MDS Breakers
225
1/2–13
3-21/32
314C960G01
400
3/4–16
5-29/32
314C960G04
400
3/4–16
8-13/32
314C960G05
400
3/4–16
10-29/32
314C960G06
600
1–12
5-29/32
314C960G07
600
1–12
8-13/32
314C960G08
600
1–12
10-29/32
314C960G09
800
1-1/8–12
5-29/32
314C960G10
800
1-1/8–12
8-13/32
314C960G11
800
1-1/8–12
10-29/32
314C960G12
8
9
10
11
12
NB, HNB, NC and HNC Breakers
800
1-1/8–12
5-1/2
623B222G01
800
1-1/8–12
8
623B222G02
800
1-1/8–12
10-1/2
623B222G03
1200
1-1/4–12
5-1/2
373B375G04
1200
1-1/4–12
10-1/2
373B375G03
13
14
15
Notes
1 For insulated panels only; two required per pole.
2 150, 250, 300 and 400A frames only.
3 This is a special stud that includes six contact nuts for use where bus contact nuts
must be used.
4 600A frames only.
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
V12-T3-67
3
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
1
Panelboard Connecting Straps
For connecting line end of breakers to panelboard bus.
2
Panelboard
Connecting Strap
3
For DA, EB, EHB, FB, JA, KA, JB, KB, LB,
LBB, HFB, HKB and HLB Breakers
Ampere Rating
Connector Type 1
Style Number
EB, EHB, FB and HFB Breakers
Narrow Distribution Panelboards 2
4
50
50
5
100
6
673B142G02
Outside
Center
624B624H01
624B624H02
LAB, LA, HLA, LC, HLC 150, 300 and 400A Frames
3
150
Center
673B142G04
400
Center
32B4570G02
673B142G03
400
Outside
314C541G01
Outside
Mounting bracket (two required)
3
208B297H01
50
Center
1253C72G01
LA, HLA, LC and HLC 600A Frames 3
50
Outside
1253C72G03
600
Center
624B609G01
600
Outside
506C052G01
Center
1253C73G03
1253C73G01
10
150
Outside
1253C73G05
Outside
1253C73G06
Three-pole mounting bracket
Two-pole mounting bracket
DA, LB, LBB and HLB Breakers
Mounting bracket (two required)
MA, HMA, MC, HMC, MD and MDS Breakers
208B297H01
3
800
Short
314C996G01
624B600H01
800
Medium
314C996G02
624B600H02
800
Long
314C996G03
Mounting bracket (four required)
3
315C270H01
400
Center
314C940G04
NB, HNB, NC and HNC Breakers 3
400
Outside
505C680G01
1200
Short
505C606G04
1200
Medium
505C606G05
JA, KA and HKA Breakers 3
1200
Long
505C606G06
225
Center
314C940G03
Mounting bracket (four required)
225
Outside
180C074G01
Notes
1 Not UL Listed.
2 Bus spacing 2.75 inches in box 5.75 inches deep (600V maximum).
3 Bus spacing 3.50 inches.
Mounting bracket (one required)
Mounting bracket (one required)
208B264H01
208B264H01
JB, KB and HKB Breakers 3
16
1253C74G02
673B142G02
Center
15
1253C74G01
Outside
Two-pole mounting bracket
150
14
Center
225
673B142G09
100
13
225
Three-pole mounting bracket
9
12
Style Number
CA Breaker Power Panelboards (Convertible) 3
673B142G10
100
11
Connector Type 1
Outside
Power Panelboards (Convertible)
8
Ampere Rating
100
150
7
Center
For CA, LAB, LA, MA, HLA, HMA and HNB Breakers
250
Center
2600D26G01
250
Outside
2600D26G02
Mounting bracket (one required)
315C270H01
1576707
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T3-68
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
3
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
Plug-In Adapter Kits
For rear-connected applications such as switchboards.
Facilitates ease of installation and front removal of breaker.
Includes conductor for mounting on breaker, plug-in mounting
blocks with matching conductor, rear studs and mounting
hardware. Order two mounting blocks style number when line
and load are required; order one mounting block style number
when either line or load is required.
■
Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products
and services. 1
Flat Bus Type
Flat Bus Type
Description
Style Number
EB, EHB, FB Thermal-Magnetic Breakers 2
Flat Bus Type—One Mounting Block, Line or Load
Two-pole, 100A
1480D13G05
Two-pole, 150A
1480D13G05
Three-pole, 100A
1480D13G06
Three-pole, 150A
1480D13G06
FB and HFB Magnetic Only, HFB Thermal-Magnetic 2
Flat Bus Type—One Mounting Block, Line or Load
Two-pole, 100A
1480D13G05
Two-pole, 150A
1480D13G05
Three-pole, 100A
1480D13G06
Three-pole, 150A
1480D13G06
JB, KB, HKB Breakers 1 Flat Bus Type—
Two Mounting Blocks, Line and Load
Two-pole
506C144G17
Three-pole
506C144G18
One Mounting Block, Line Only
Two-pole
1260C86G01
Three-pole
1260C86G02
Two-pole
1260C86G03
Three-pole
1260C86G04
Threaded Stud Type
Threaded Studs Type
Description
Style Number
4
JA, KA and HKA Breakers (Threaded Studs
Type)—Two Mounting Blocks, Line and Load
313C644G29
Three-pole
313C644G30
3
Two-pole
314C932G01
Three-pole
314C932G02
4
One Mounting Block, Line or Load
LA, HLA, LC and HLC (600A Frames) 2 (Threaded
Studs)—Two Mounting Blocks, Line and Load
313C644G50
Three-pole
313C644G51
6
Two-pole
506C059G03
7
Three-pole
506C059G04
One Mounting Block, Line or Load
One Mounting Block, Line or Load Flat Bus Type
Two-pole
1288C19G01
Three-pole
1288C19G02
MA, HMA, MC, HMC, MD, MDS, NB, HNB, NC, HNC
and NB TRI-PAC Breakers 4 (Flat Bus Type)—
One Mounting Block, Line or Load
MA, HMA, MC, HMC, MD, MDS two-pole
2614D53G05
MA, HMA, MC, HMC, MD, MDS three-pole
2614D53G06
NB, HNB, NC, HNC, NB TRI-PAC two-pole
2614D53G03
NB, HNB, NC, HNC, NB TRI-PAC three-pole
2614D53G04
Mounting Plates
Description
Two-pole
313C644G25
JA, KA
504C823H01
Three-pole
313C644G26
DA, LB, LBB, ALB
178C781H01
LA, LAB, HLA, LC, HLC
504C824H01
MA, HMA, MC, MMC, NB, HNB, NC, HNC
1290C73H01
450D010G16
Two-pole
313C644G45
Three-pole
313C644G46
One Mounting Block, Line or Load
Two-pole
314C932G03
Three-pole
314C932G04
Notes
1 These accessories are no longer available.
2 These plug-in adapter kits are UL Listed as recognized
components.
3 700–1200A adapter kit is front removable, bolt-on design—
not plug-in type.
4 Not UL Listed.
313C644G27
Two-pole, 700–800A
176C544G01 3
Three-pole, 125–600A
313C644G28
Three-pole, 700–800A
176C544G02 3
313C370G03
Two-pole, 700–800A
507C049G01 3
Three-pole, 125–600A
313C370G04
Three-pole, 700–800A
507C049G02 3
12
15
16
17
18
19
21
22
23
One Mounting Block, Line or Load
Two-pole, 125–600A
11
20
MA, HMA, MC, HMC, MD and MDS Breakers 3
Threaded Studs—Two Mounting Blocks,
Line and Load
Two-pole, 125–600A
10
14
Predrilled panels for:
179C207H01
DA, LB, LBB, HLB Breakers 2 Flat Bus Type—
Two Mounting Blocks, Line and Load
9
13
507C047H01
Three-pole
8
Style Number
JB, KB
450D010G15
5
Two-pole
EB, EHB, FB, HFB
Two-pole
2
Two-pole
LAB, LA, HLA, LC and HLC (150, 250, 300 and
400A Frame) (Threaded Studs Type)—
Two Mounting Blocks, Line and Load
One Mounting Block, Line or Load
1
24
25
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
V12-T3-69
3
1
2
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
Extended Line Terminal Shields
For shielding line side terminal connections. One shield required
per breaker. Order separately when needed. Sold only in lots of
10, including hardware.
For complete installation, order:
1. Front-connected, non-automatic PB breaker.
(Order similar to standard front connected, except
omit load conductor extensions.)
Extended Line Terminal Shields 1
2. Fuse mounting base.
Breaker Frame
Style Number
3. Fuses (from distributor).
4
JB, KB, HKB
1266C07G01
MA, HMA, MC, HMC
208B966G01
5
NB, HNB, NC, HNC
208B966G02
LAB, LA, (Saf-T-Vue)
314C420G02
JA, KA, LB, LBB (Saf-T-Vue)
314C420G04
LAB, LA, HLA, LC, HLC
314C420G05
DA
314C420G06
JA, KA, HKA, LB, LBB, HLB (standard breaker)
314C420G06
EB, EHB, FB, HFB
625B229G08 2
3
Line Terminal Shield
6
7
8
9
10
Handle Locks
Non-Padlockable
For prevention of unintentional operation of breaker. Fits over
breaker handle and may be removed.
Padlockable
For prevention of unauthorized operation of breaker. Is nonremovable once installed on breaker. Meets Underwriters
Laboratories and California Code requirements.
Handle Locks
Base Mounting Hardware
No charge when ordered with breaker. Order separately
when needed.
Line Terminal Shield
Breaker Frame
Style Number
Non-Padlockable
FA, EA, CA, EB, EHB, FB, HFB
29B2721H01
LAB, LA, LC, HLC, MA, NB, HLA, HMA, HNB, 28B4596G01
MC, HMC, NC, HNC
Base Mounting Hardware
Description
Handle Locks 15
Style Number
GB, GC, GHB, GHC
1294C01H01
DA, JA, KA, HKA, LB, LBB, HLB
29B2721H04
11
Single-Pole Breakers
EB, EHB, HFB 3
624B375G01
Padlockable
12
EB, EHB, HFB 4
624B375G02
CA
506C438G01
Two- and Three-Pole Breakers
FA, EA, EB, EHB, FB, HFB, MCP150
765A754G01
13
LAB, LA, HLA, LC, HLC, MA, NB, HMA, HNB, MC 21C6782G05
DA, JA, KA, LB, LBB, HKA, HLB, MCP400
673B796G02
HMC, NC, HNC
1091716
JB, KB, HKB, MCP250
673B796G01
14
PB, PC, PCC
624B375G22
LAB, LA, HLA, LC, HLC
373B591G02
DA, JA, KA, HKA, LB, LBB, HLB
21C6782G22
MA, HMA, MC, HMC, MD, MDS
6591C30G02–OFF
EB, EHB, FB, HFB, MCP
21C6782G18
JB, KB, HKB
673B125G12
MA, HMA, MC, HMC, MD, MDS
6591C30G05–ON/OFF
NB, HNB, NC, HNC
6591C30G01–OFF
NB, HNB, NC, HNC
6591C30G04–ON/OFF
PA, SPCB, PB, Tri-Pac PB, PC
6591C30G03–OFF
15
CA two-pole
16
17
CA three-pole
21C6782G28
21C6782G29
Fuse Mounting Base for PB Breakers
18
19
Notes
1 Not UL Listed.
2 One of style 625B229G08 is one package of 10.
3 Individually mounted.
4 Group mounted.
5 All breakers are trip free and will trip with handle locks attached.
Cannot be used when handle extension is used.
20
For 2000A non-automatic breakers only.
21
22
23
24
25
Fuse Mounting Base for PB Breakers
Style Number
6635C78G02 1
For use with non-automatic, three-pole circuit breaker. Includes
fuse mounting base and hardware to mount standard Class L
current limiting fuses, 801–2000A (fuses not included).
Note: Interrupters used with fuse mounting base will accept all standard
PB accessories. See Dimension Sheet 29-171 for mounting details.
V12-T3-70
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
3
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
Cable Connectors
The fuse mounting base will accept the following terminals
for front cable connection (omit “T” connectors from rear
connected breakers).
Cable Connectors
Wire Range, Type Number of Cables
Style Number
(3) 3/0–400 kcmil Cu
672B655G01
(4) 400–500 kcmil Cu
180C046G03
Molded Type Handle Extension
For LAB, LA and HLA Breakers 1
Style Number
372B399G01
For MA, HMA, MC, HMC, NB, HNB, NC and HNC Breakers 1
Style Number
1251C65G01 2
For PB, PC, PCC and PA/RD Breakers 1
Style Number
6635C78G02 2
Modifications
Only two internally mounted
modifications—shunt trip,
undervoltage release,
auxiliary switch, alarm
switch—may be mounted
in EB through PB. Only one
of these modifications may
be mounted in FB, HFB
magnetic only, two-pole EB,
EHB, FB and SELTRONIC
breakers. None are available
in single-pole breakers except
alarm switch in EB, EHB and
HFB. Contact Avery Creek,
NC, Technical Resource
Center for possible special
combinations of the following
modifications not in
tabulations. Contact factory
for pricing if accessories
are factory installed.
Factory-Mounted Shunt Trips
Factory-mounted shunt trips
only can be supplied for the
following breakers: CA, HCA,
CAH, HFB magnetic only
and PB/PBF non-automatic
breakers (molded-case
switches). They are 120 Vac
rated, suitable for 55% pickup
for ground fault application.
Right hand mounting is
standard and they are not
UL Listed.
1
Notes
1 Not UL listed.
2 Included with frame at no charge.
6
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
Shunt Trip
For tripping breaker from
a remote point. A solenoid
device mounts within breaker
case. Breaker trips when
coil is energized.
10
Shunt trips should not be
used as circuit interlocks
using maintained contact
pilot devices.
12
11
13
A cutoff switch breaks the
circuit to the momentary rated
coil when the breaker opens.
Available for control voltages
up to 250 Vdc or 600 Vac.
Voltage and frequency must
be specified. Standard leads
extend 18.00 inches outside
the breaker. Longer leads may
be specified.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
V12-T3-71
3
1
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
■
Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services.
Shunt Trip for Field Mounting 123
Shunt Trip
4
Breaker Type Catalog Number
2
Voltage/Hz
EB, EHB, FB, HFB 5
(Thermal-Magnetic Only)
JB, KB, HKB
JA, KA, HKA, DA,
LB, LBB, HLB
LA, LAB, HLA
MA, HMA
NB, HNB
PB TRI-PAC
and PA
3
Right-Hand Mounting
600/50–60 Hz
2609D39G15
2609D42G15
2605D15G15
2606D56G15
2606D57G15
2606D58G15
2606D59G15
4
480/50–60 Hz
2609D39G16
2609D42G16
2605D15G16
2606D56G16
2606D57G16
2606D58G16
2606D59G16
240/50–60 Hz
2609D39G17
2609D42G17
2605D15G17
2606D56G17
2606D57G17
2606D58G17
2606D59G17
5
208/50–60 Hz
2609D39G18
2609D42G18
2605D15G18
2606D56G18
2606D57G18
2606D58G18
2606D59G18
120/50–60 Hz
2609D39G19
2609D42G19
2605D15G19
2606D56G19
2606D57G19
2606D58G19
2606D59G19
6
60/50–60 Hz
2609D39G20
2609D42G20
2605D15G20
2606D56G20
2606D57G20
2606D58G20
2606D59G20
48/50–60 Hz
2609D39G21
2609D42G21
2605D15G21
2606D56G21
2606D57G21
2606D58G21
2606D59G21
7
24/50–60 Hz
2609D39G22
2609D42G22
2605D15G22
2606D56G22
2606D57G22
2606D58G22
2606D59G22
250 DC
2609D39G23
2609D42G23
2605D15G23
2606D56G23
2606D57G23
2606D58G23
2606D59G23
8
125 DC
2609D39G24
2609D42G24
2605D15G24
2606D56G24
2606D57G24
2606D58G24
2606D59G24
60 DC
2609D39G25
2609D42G25
2605D15G25
2606D56G25
2606D57G25
2606D58G25
2606D59G25
48 DC
2609D39G26
2609D42G26
2605D15G26
2606D56G26
2606D57G26
2606D58G26
2606D59G26
24 DC
2609D39G27
2609D42G27
2605D15G27
2606D56G27
2606D57G27
2606D58G27
2606D59G27
12 DC
2609D39G28
2609D42G28
2605D15G28
2606D56G28
2606D57G28
2606D58G28
2606D59G28
9
10
Left-Hand Mounting
600/50–60 Hz
2609D39G01
2609D42G01
2605D15G01
2606D56G01
2606D57G01
2606D58G01
2606D59G01
480/50–60 Hz
2609D39G02
2609D42G02
2605D15G02
2606D56G02
2606D57G02
2606D58G02
2606D59G02
240/50–60 Hz
2609D39G03
2609D42G03
2605D15G03
2606D56G03
2606D57G03
2606D58G03
2606D59G03
12
208/50–60 Hz
2609D39G04
2609D42G04
2605D15G04
2606D56G04
2606D57G04
2606D58G04
2606D59G04
120/50–60 Hz
2609D39G05
2609D42G05
2605D15G05
2606D56G05
2606D57G05
2606D58G05
2606D59G05
13
60/50–60 Hz
2609D39G06
2609D42G06
2605D15G06
2606D56G06
2606D57G06
2606D58G06
2606D59G06
48/50–60 Hz
2609D39G07
2609D42G07
2605D15G07
2606D56G07
2606D57G07
2606D58G07
2606D59G07
14
24/50–60 Hz
2609D39G08
2609D42G08
2605D15G08
2606D56G08
2606D57G08
2606D58G08
2606D59G08
250 DC
2609D39G09
2609D42G09
2605D15G09
2606D56G09
2606D57G09
2606D58G09
2606D59G09
15
125 DC
2609D39G10
2609D42G10
2605D15G10
2606D56G10
2606D57G10
2606D58G10
2606D59G10
60 DC
2609D39G11
2609D42G11
2605D15G11
2606D56G11
2606D57G11
2606D58G11
2606D59G11
16
48 DC
2609D39G12
2609D42G12
2605D15G12
2606D56G12
2606D57G12
2606D58G12
2606D59G12
24 DC
2609D39G13
2609D42G13
2605D15G13
2606D56G13
2606D57G13
2606D58G13
2606D59G13
17
12 DC
2609D39G14
2609D42G14
2605D15G14
2606D56G14
2606D57G14
2606D58G14
2606D59G14
11
Notes
1 120 Vac ratings suitable for 55% pickup for ground fault applications.
2 Not field mountable on non-automatic breakers (molded-case switches).
3 Field mounting voids breakers’ UL listing except on LA, HLA, MA, HMA, NB, HNB, PB, KB, HKB, KA, HKA, LB, HLB and SELTRONIC breakers.
4 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-168.
5 Available similar to this except “Leads out the load end—(not UL Listed).” Order by description.
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T3-72
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
3
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
Left-Hand Mounting Kits for SELTRONIC Breakers
Shunt Trip Coil Data
Left-Hand Mounting Kits for SELTRONIC Breakers
Breaker
Type
Description
Provision to trip flux transfer shunt trip from
external 32 to 120 Vdc and Vac to 60 Hz source 12
Provision to trip flux transfer shunt trip from
external 240 to 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz source 23
Style
Number
MC, HMC
1371D72G22
NC, HNC
1372D39G13
PC, PCC
1372D35G22
LC, HLC
1371D11G22
MC, HMC
1371D72G32
NC, HNC
1372D39G23
PC, PCC
1372D35G32
LC, HLC
1371D11G32
Shunt Trip
Voltage
Rating
For All Breakers Listed in Previous
Table and on Previous Page
Except CA and SELTRONIC
Coil Inrush
1
2
SELTRONIC
Coil Inrush
Amperes
Volt-Amperes
Amperes
Volt-Amperes
600 AC
0.105
63.0
—
—
480 AC
0.085
40.8
—
—
240 AC
1.7
408.0
—
—
208 AC
1.4
291.2
—
—
120 AC
0.88
105.6
15
18
60 AC
9.10
546.0
—
—
48 AC
7.50
360.0
—
—
24 AC
3.95
94.8
—
—
250 DC
2.5
625.0
—
—
125 DC
0.975
121.9
—
—
60 DC
0.525
31.5
—
—
48 DC
1.3
62.4
—
—
24 DC (FB)
6
144.0
—
—
24 DC (KB)
3.8
91.2
—
—
24 DC (others)
8
192
—
—
12 DC
6
72
—
—
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Notes
1 Rated 48V minimum for ground fault applications.
2 Also available for 24 Vdc. Order by description.
3 Not for ground fault.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
V12-T3-73
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
21
Note: Undervoltage release
attachments are not designed
for, and should not be used as,
circuit interlocks. For further
information, Contact Avery
Creek, NC, Technical Resource
Center at 1-800-356-1243.
Factory-Mounted
Undervoltage Releases
All of the above undervoltage
releases can be specified for
factory mounting. Contact
factory for pricing. These
attachments have the leads
out the side and are UL
Listed when factory mounted
unless other non-UL Listed
modifications are used.
Note: Right-hand mounting
is considered standard unless
specified otherwise except JA,
KA, DA, HKA, LB, LBB, HLB
and SELTRONIC available
for left-hand only. JB, KB, HKB
are obsolete.
Factory-mounted
undervoltage releases
only can be supplied for
the following breakers:
●
●
●
22
23
Replacement Capabilities
Standard Undervoltage Release
For undervoltage protection.
A solenoid device mounts
within a breaker case. Coil
must be energized before
closing breaker. Trips breaker
when voltage drops below 35
to 70% of coil rating. Picks
up and seals in at 85% of coil
rating. For line voltages
up to 250 Vdc or 600 Vac.
Externally mounted resistors
are supplied for certain
ratings. Standard leads
extend 18.00 inches outside
of breaker. Longer leads may
be specified.
19
20
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
●
SELTRONIC breakers
(120 Vac, 60 Hz only
standard), MC, HMC, NC,
HNC, PC, PCC, LC, HLC
SELTRONIC breakers with
remote trip provisions,
MC, HMC 2 , NC, HNC 2 ,
PC, PCC 2 , LC, HLC 2
EB 3 , EHB 3 , FB 3 , HFB 3 ,
FB 45 and HFB magnetic
only 45
No UVR available for CA,
CAH and HCA
Standard Undervoltage
Release
Undervoltage Release Attachment Kits for Field Mounting 67
Breaker Type
Attachment
Voltage, Hz
JA, KA, DA, HKA,
LB, LBB, HLB
LA, LAB, HLA
MA, HMA
NB, HNB
PB, PA 4
For Right-Hand Mounting
24, 60
—
60A9355G17
—
—
—
48, 60
—
60A9355G08
—
—
5674D29G16
120, 60
—
60A9355G01
457D727G01
373D632G01
5674D29G09
208, 60
—
60A9355G02
457D727G19
373D632G19
5674D29G10
240, 60
—
60A9355G03
457D727G02
373D632G02
5674D29G11
480, 60
—
60A9355G05
457D727G03
373D632G03
5674D29G13
600, 60
—
60A9355G06
457D727G04
373D632G04
5674D29G14
12 DC
—
458D020G01
457D727G09
372D032G01
4976D85G01
24 DC
—
458D020G02
457D727G10
372D032G02
4976D85G02
48 DC
—
458D020G03
457D727G11
372D032G03
4976D85G03
60 DC
—
458D020G04
457D727G21
—
4976D85G04
125 DC
—
458D020G07
457D727G12
372D032G04
4976D85G07
250 DC
—
458D020G08
457D727G13
372D032G05
4976D85G08
For Left-Hand Mounting
48, 60
—
60A9355G16
—
—
5674D29G08
120, 60
458D070G01
60A9355G09
457D727G05
373D632G05
5674D29G01
208, 60
458D070G05
60A9355G10
457D727G20
373D632G20
5674D29G02
240, 60
458D070G02
60A9355G11
457D727G06
373D632G06
5674D29G03
480, 60
458D070G03
60A9355G13
457D727G07
373D632G07
5674D29G05
600, 60
458D070G04
60A9355G14
457D727G08
373D632G08
5674D29G06
12 DC
458D070G09
458D020G11
457D727G14
372D032G06
4976D85G11
24 DC
458D070G10
458D020G12
457D727G15
372D032G07
4976D85G12
48 DC
458D070G11
458D020G13
457D727G16
372D032G08
4976D85G13
60 DC
—
458D020G14
457D727G22
—
4976D85G14
125 DC
458D070G12
458D020G17
457D727G17
372D032G09
4976D85G17
250 DC
458D070G13
458D020G18
457D727G18
372D032G10
4976D85G18
Notes
1 Cannot be used with other attachments except a small 1A-1B auxiliary switch rated 250V can be supplied in
right-hand pole.
2 Provided with two leads (total of four) for use with a remote normally open contact (pushbutton, etc.) to trip the
breaker. No external power required.
3 Not available on ambient compensating breakers.
4 Not UL Listed.
5 Right-hand mounting only.
6 Not field mountable on non-automatic breakers (molded-case switches).
7 Field mounting voids UL listing of breaker except on LA, HLA, MA, HMA, NB, HNB, PB, KA, HKA, LB and HLB.
24
25
V12-T3-74
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
3
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
Undervoltage Release Coil Data
1
Breaker Type
JA, KA, HKA, DA, LB, LBB and HLB
EB, EHB, FB, HFB, JB, KB and HKB
Voltage
Rating Hz
Coil
Amperes
External Series
Resistance (Ohms)
Total
VA
Coil
Amperes
External Series
Resistance (Ohms)
LA, LAB, HLA and PB
Total
VA
Coil
Amperes
External Series
Resistance (Ohms)
Total
VA
600 AC
0.020
25,000
12.0
0.012
50,000
7.2
0.029
20,000
17.4
480 AC
0.016
20,000
7.7
0.013
30,000
6.3
0.014
—
6.8
240 AC
0.021
6000
5.1
0.013
—
3.2
0.036
—
8.7
208 AC
0.019
6000
4.0
0.018
—
3.8
0.036
—
7.5
120 AC
0.023
—
2.8
0.023
—
2.8
0.073
—
8.8
60 AC
0.203
250
12.2
—
—
—
—
—
—
48 AC
0.245
150
11.8
—
—
—
0.152
—
7.3
24 AC
0.250
50
6.0
—
—
—
—
—
—
250 DC
0.026
5000
6.5
0.013
16,500
3.3
0.035
5000
8.8
125 DC
0.026
—
3.3
0.013
6500
1.7
0.039
1500
4.9
60 DC
0.248
200
14.9
0.013
1500
0.8
0.034
—
2.1
48 DC
0.260
150
12.5
0.012
600
0.6
0.040
—
2.0
24 DC
0.141
—
3.4
0.023
—
0.6
0.069
—
1.7
12 DC
0.286
—
3.5
0.048
—
0.6
0.136
—
1.7
MA and HMA
NB and HNB
MC, HMC, NC, HNC, PC, PCC, LC and HLC
Coil
Amperes
External Series
Resistance (Ohms)
Total
VA
Coil
Amperes
External Series
Resistance (Ohms)
Total
VA
Coil
Amperes
External Series
Resistance (Ohms)
Total
VA
600 AC
0.012
50,000
7.2
0.016
35,000
9.6
—
—
—
480 AC
0.013
30,000
6.3
0.013
30,000
6.3
—
—
—
240 AC
0.013
—
3.2
0.013
—
3.2
—
—
—
208 AC
0.018
—
3.8
0.018
—
3.8
—
—
—
120 AC
0.023
—
2.8
0.023
—
2.8
0.5
—
6
60 AC
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
48 AC
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
24 AC
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
250 DC
0.013
16,500
3.3
0.013
16,500
3.3
—
—
—
125 DC
0.013
6500
1.7
0.013
6500
1.7
—
—
—
60 DC
0.013
1500
0.8
—
—
—
—
—
—
48 DC
0.012
600
0.6
0.012
600
0.6
—
—
—
24 DC
0.02
—
0.6
0.023
—
0.6
—
—
—
12 DC
0.048
—
0.6
0.048
—
0.6
—
—
—
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
V12-T3-75
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
Alarm Switch Contact
Rating (Non-Inductive)
●
●
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Replacement Capabilities
Alarm Switch
Availability: EB through PC.
For light or alarm indication
when breaker trips. Does
not function with manual
operation. Automatically
resets when breaker is
relatched. Standard leads
extend 18.00 inches outside
of breaker. Longer leads
may be specified. Not
field mountable.
7
8
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
●
MC, HMC, LA, LAB, HLA,
LC, HLC: 10A, 120 Vac;
5A, 240 Vac
EB, EHB, FB, HFB:
5A, 120 Vac
All other breakers:
10A, 120–240 Vac
Auxiliary Switch
For auxiliary control circuits.
Miniature switches mount
within breaker. Commonly
used for remote indication
of open or closed breaker
and electrically interlocking
component control circuits.
“A” contacts are closed
when breaker is closed.
“B” contacts are open when
breaker is closed. Standard
leads extend 18.00 inches
outside of breaker. Longer
leads may be specified.
Factory-Mounted
Auxiliary Switches
All of the above auxiliary
switches can be specified
for factory mounting at the
same price as listed for the
kit. These attachments have
the leads out the side of the
breaker and are UL Listed
when factory mounted
unless other non-UL Listed
modifications are used
(except as noted).
Switch with 2A-2B
Contacts
Switch Schematic
Note: Right-hand mounting
standard for EB, EHB, FB, HFB,
JB, KB and HKB. All others are
left-hand mounting as standard
unless otherwise specified.
Red Lead
Factory-mounted switches
only can be supplied for the
following breaker:
●
Black Lead
JB, LBB, LAB, JA, DA, FB l
magnetic only 2m and HFB
magnetic only 2m
Blue Lead
Alarm Switch
Breaker
Frame
Normal
Pole Mounting
Contact Operation
(Specify Type Desired)
DA 1
Left
Make or break
EB 1, EHB 1, FB 1, HFB 23
Mechanism
Make or break
JA 1, KA 1, LB 1, LBB 1, HKA, HLB
Left
Make or break
JB 1, KB 1, HKB 1
Left
Make or break
LAB 1, LA 1, MA 1, NB 1, HLA, HMA, HNB
Left
Make or break
LC 1, HLC
Left 4
Make or break
MC 1, HMC
Left only 4
NC
1,
HNC
Left only
Make or break
4
Make or break
PB
Left
Make or break
PC, PCC
Left 45
Make or break
■
Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services.
Auxiliary Switch Attachment Kits for Field Mounting 678
Maximum
Breaker
Type
k
9
For Left-Hand Mounting
For Right-Hand Mounting
AC Voltage
Rating j
Non-inductive
Amperes
1A-1B
2A-2B
1A-1B
2A-2B
240
5
4979D06G03
4979D06G09
4979D06G03
4979D06G08
JA, KA, DA, HKA, LB
480
10
458D067G03
—
458D067G08
—
LBB, HLB
240
5
—
656D527G01 2
—
656D527G09 2
JB, KB, HKB
480
10
2600D97G03
—
2600D97G08
—
17
JB, KB, HKB
240
5
—
2609D45G03 9
—
2609D45G08 9
LA, LAB, HLA
480
10
655D555G12
655D555G13
655D555G05
655D555G06
18
MA, HMA
480
10
458D013G12
458D013G13
458D013G05
458D013G06
NB, HNB
480
10
4980D16G12
4980D16G13
4980D16G05
4980D16G06
19
PB, PA
480
10
2602D32G11
2602D32G12
2602D32G14
2602D32G15
MC, HMC, MCG, HMCG
480
6 (10 at 24)
1371D72G03
1371D72G06
—
—
20
NC, HNC, NCG, HNCG
480
6 (10 at 24)
1372D39G03
1372D39G06
—
—
PC, PCC, PCG, PCCG
480
6 (10 at 24)
1372D35G03
1372D35G06
—
—
LC, HLC, LCG, HLCG
480
6 (10 at 24)
1371D11G03
1371D11G06
—
—
16
Note: Right-hand mounting
standard for EB, EHB, FB, HFB,
JB, KB and HKB. All others are
left-hand mounting as standard
unless otherwise specified.
21
EB, EHB, FB, HFB
Notes
1 Alarm switches are no longer available
for these frames.
2 Not UL Listed.
3 Not available for magnetic only,
ambient compensating, or breakers
with undervoltage release.
4 When alarm switch is used in
conjunction with auxiliary switch,
the auxiliary switch is rated 250 Vac,
5A maximum.
22
23
24
5
6
7
8
Except when other attachments are
used, must be mounted in right pole.
Not for use on molded-case switches.
All switches are multiples of 1A-1B with
a common electrical connection (see
diagram above right).
Field mounting voids UL listing of breaker
except on LA, HLA, MA, HMA, NB,
HNB, KB, HKB, KA, HKA, LB, HLB and
SELTRONIC breakers.
9
j
k
l
m
These accessories are no
longer available.
For DC applications, refer to factory.
Thermal-magnetic only.
Auxiliary switches are no longer
available for these frames.
Right-hand mounting only.
25
V12-T3-76
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
3
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
■
Shaded area denotes
obsolete or discontinued
products and services.
A. Walking Beam Type
B. Sliding Bar Type
(Field Mountable)
Center Studs
1
2
Moisture-Fungus-Corrosion
Treatment
Availability: EB through PC.
Treatment can be provided
to meet customer’s
specific atmospheric
conditions. Moisturefungus treating material
used meets JAN-T-152;
treatment meets
MIL-V-173a. Requests
and orders should specify
government specifications
or conditions to be met.
Note: Not UL Listed.
Mechanical Interlocks (A-C)
For mechanically interlocking
a pair of breakers so that only
one may be closed at one
time, but both may be open
simultaneously.
Note: Not UL Listed.
3
Sliding Bar Type
4
Availability: HFB through PC.
Walking Beam
Availability: EB through PC.
Mounts on panel (not
included) at rear of breaker.
Standard breaker spacing:
center to center; LAB, LA,
LC, HLC, MA, MC, NB, NC,
HLA, HMA, HMC, HNB and
HNC 8.50-inch center to
center; PB, PC and PCC
12.25-inch center to center;
DA, JA, KA, HKA, LB, LBB
and HLB 5.75 inch center
to center; EB, EHB, FB,
JB, KB, HFB and HKB
4.375 inch center to center.
Order as a set of two
special factory drilled
breakers and one walking
beam interlock. Specify
breaker type, panel
thickness and center
to center dimension
of breakers.
Note: Not UL Listed. 2000A
maximum for PB breaker. Not
available on drawout breakers.
Mounts on panel (not included)
fitting over front of breakers.
Standard breaker spacing:
HLC, HLA, HMA, HMC, HNB
and HNC 8.50-inch center
to center; HKA and HLB
5.75-inch center to center;
HFB 4.1875-inch center
to center.
C. Kirk Key Interlock
Kirk Key Interlock
Availability: EB through PC.
Permits interlocking of two
breakers or one breaker
with other devices. Before
breaker can be closed,
key must be inserted and
turned in breaker interlock.
Breaker must be opened
before key can be
removed. It can then be
inserted in interlock or
other devices to permit
their closure. Requests and
orders should completely
outline interlocking
scheme, ultimate user
and address.
5
Center Studs
Availability: 600A frames
(LA) through (NB) 1200A
frames except SELTRONIC
and current limiting
breakers.
6
Provides connections for
dual voltage generators, so
that same trip unit can be
used for protection at both
voltages. At higher voltage,
the trip unit carries full load
current. At lower voltage,
half the current bypasses
the trip unit through the
center studs. Trip rating
cannot exceed 50% of
frame rating.
8
Field Discharge Switch
Availability: 400, 600A
frame (LA).
Breaker is used exclusively
to discharge the field of
a DC motor or generator,
usually through a resistor.
When the two outer
poles open, the center
pole closes.
Note: Not UL Listed.
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Note: Not available on motor
operated breakers. (No CA,
LCL, FCL breakers.)
20
21
22
23
24
25
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
V12-T3-77
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
Motor Operators
Motor operators provide
complete remote control by
means of a pushbutton or a
similar pilot device.
Note: The pilot device must be
maintained contact type for EB,
EHB, FB, HFB, DA, JA, KA, JB,
KB, HKB and LB mechanisms,
momentary contact type for
all others.
Positive switching action is
accomplished by use of an
operating arm engaging the
breaker handle. The unit is
energized momentarily to
actuate the lever arm moving
it to either the ON or OFF
position. The control is broken
by an internal cutoff switch.
Means for emergency manual
operations is provided.
For LAB, LA, HLA Breakers
For EB, EHB, FB
and HFB
Motor operations are
available with motors
rated 120 Vac, 208 Vac
and 240 Vac.
Note: LA and larger available for
125 Vdc.
The 480V operators use a
120 Vac motor in conjunction
with a 480/240V to 120V
dual voltage transformer.
(On LA and larger operators,
the transformer is supplied
for separate mounting by
the customer.)
Note: The motor operator is
intended only for infrequent
operation in line with Underwriters
Laboratories endurance standards
for molded-case breakers.
Minimum 1 kVA transformer
is required for use with all
motor operations.
Back Mounting Plates
Breaker
Type
120, 208, 240,
480 Vac
Style Number
For DA, JA, KA, JB,
LB, LBB, HKA, HKB
and HLB Breakers
For MA, HMA, NB, HNB Breakers
For PB Breakers
Motor Operator Selection 12
Breaker
Type
Style Number—AC Voltage
EB, EHB, FB, HFB
656D148G11 656D148G04 656D148G02 656D148G13 —
—
DA, JA, KA, HKA
657D819G23 657D819G10 657D819G08 657D819G24 —
—
LB, LBB, HLB
657D819G25 657D819G16 657D819G14 657D819G26 —
—
LAB, LA, HLA, LC, HLC
2607D97G37 2607D97G40 2607D97G38 2607D97G39 2607D97G51
2607D97G42
MA, HMA, MC, HMC
5664D54G75 5664D54G78 5664D54G76 5664D54G77 5664D54G96
5664D54G81
NB, HNB, NC, HNC.
SPCB1200
1494D60G31 1494D60G32 1494D60G33 1494D60G34 1494D60G35
1494D60G36
PB, PC, PCC, PA,
SPCB2000
5661D52G01 5661D52G04 5661D52G02 5661D52G03 5661D52G17
—
120
208
Style Number—DC Voltage
240
480
125
24
Motor Data
Inrush Current,
Ampere (Peak)
Continuous
Current (rms)
Breaker
Type
Motor
Type
Hp
120V
208V
240V
120V
208V
240V
Operating
Time, Open
or Close
EB, EHB,
FB, HFB
Split-phase
1/75
10
4
5
2.3
1.17
1.65
1.5 seconds
DA, JA, KA,
JB, KB, LB, LBB,
HKB, HLB
Split-phase
1/50
14
6
7
3.5
1.6
1.75
1.5 seconds
LAB, LA, HLA
Reversing
—
8
5
4
—
—
—
12 cycles
MA, HMA, NB,
HNB, SPCB1200
Reversing
—
11
7
6
—
—
—
12 cycles
PB, PA,
SPCB2000
Reversing
—
20
12
11
—
—
—
10 cycles
Notes
1 AC voltage rated operators are UL Listed as recognized components.
2 See Dimension Sheet 29-170.
EB, EHB, FB, HFB
503C707G01
DA, JA, KA, LB, HLB
503C981G01
V12-T3-78
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
21
22
23
24
25
3
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
Drawout Frame
These drawout frames are
for use with standard threepole Cutler-Hammer moldedcase circuit breakers. They
consist of two separate
parts: stationary mounting
frame and movable carrier
frame. Slide rails are
drawer-type, and a screw
mechanism is used to
engage or withdraw the
movable carrier frame.
The drawout frames have three
positions: connected, test and
disconnected. The frames do
not include a safety tripping
interlock or secondary
contacts. These are optional
items and may be ordered at
additional cost.
Breakers mounted in the
drawout frames can be
equipped with standard
breaker accessories including
shunt trip, undervoltage
release, auxiliary switch,
alarm switch and motor
operator.
Optional Features
Safety Interlock
This feature trips the breaker
as the movable carrier frame
is withdrawn, and must be
factory installed. Order
as follows.
Note: Safety interlock not
available on MC, NC, HMC,
HNC, LC and HLC.
For LA, MA and
NB Breakers
Order standard stationary
mounting frame. Order
breaker and movable carrier
frame assembled with
safety interlock.
Drawout Frame
Selection Data 12
Stationary Mounting Frame
Style Number
Movable Carrier Frame
Style Number
HLA600, HLC600, LA600, LD, HLD 3
2603D84G01
2608D35G06
HMA, HMC, MDL, HMDL 3
2603D85G01
2608D34G10
HNB, HNC, ND, HND 3
2603D85G01
2608D34G08
PB, PC, PCC 2000A 4
2601D18G04
Order by description 5
PB 2500A, PC, PCC 2500A and 3000A 4
2601D18G05
Order by description 5
4
Notes
1 Safety interlock not available on MC, NC,
HMC, HNC, LC and HLC.
2 SELTRONIC circuit breakers with built-in
ground fault require a special breaker
frame with leads out the side in place
of standard terminal block. Order by
description the breaker frame and carrier
as one assembly.
3 These units are UL Listed.
4 Not UL Listed.
5 Factory installed only.
5
Ordering Information
Note: SELTRONIC circuit
breakers with built-in ground fault
require a special breaker frame
with leads out the side in place of
standard terminal block. Order by
description the breaker frame and
carrier as one assembly.
Standard Installation
Order one stationary
mounting frame and one
movable carrier frame.
Order breakers without
terminals or rear connectors.
Order any attachments
desired (shunt trip,
undervoltage release, etc.)
Order secondary contacts
as required:
●
●
●
●
1
Breaker
Type
A shunt trip, an undervoltage release or an
alarm switch requires
two contacts
A 1A-1B auxiliary switch
requires three contacts
A motor operator requires
a maximum of four
contacts
Others as required
With Safety Interlock
Order stationary mounting
frame and movable carrier
frame as directed under
optional features.
Racking Crank
A special crank to engage or
withdraw the moving portion
of the drawout. A standard
0.50-inch hex socket with
extension can be used for
this purpose.
2
3
6
7
8
9
Racking Crank
10
Style Number
11
765A767G01
Cell Switches Mounted
on Drawout Frames,
All Ratings
Up to four switches can be
provided. Order by description.
12
13
Each switch provides
NO and NC contact that
transfers before reaching
the test position when being
withdrawn, and after the test
position when being racked
in. Contact factory for pricing.
14
15
16
17
18
19
Secondary Contacts
These are used to disconnect
auxiliary circuits when
attachments such as shunt
trip or motor operator are
used. Available in multiples
of four contacts with a
maximum of 24 contacts for
the LA 600 or 32 contacts for
the MA and NB. They must
be factory mounted. Order
by description as similar to
stationary or moving frame
and specify number of
contacts required.
20
21
22
23
24
25
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
V12-T3-79
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
Panelboard “Only”
Replacement Breaker
Selection Guide
■
Panelboard “Only”
replacement breakers
are generally for use as
replacement for out-ofproduction panelboard
branch circuit breakers
where both physical and
electrical interchangeability
is required. Where possible,
consideration should be
given to application of either
current Series C or Series G
circuit breakers.
120 Vac
240 Vac
Breaker
Type
Amperes Sym. Asym. Sym.
Asym.
Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services.
Panelboard “Only” Replacement Breaker Selection Guide
Panelboard Replacement Breaker Interrupting Ampere Rating
For additional information,
consult the charts on
Pages V12-T3-84 and
V12-T3-85 or contact your
local Eaton Field Sales
office or the Breaker
Service Centers.
Replacement Chart 1
Current
Panelboard
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Out-ofVac
Production (50/60 Hz)
Circuit
Breaker
Type
240 480 600
REA 1
EA 1
■
RE
E1
■
REH
EH 1
RFA 1
FA 1
RHFA
HFA
1
F1
RF
J2
■
RK 1
K2
■
RHK
HK 2
■
RKL 1
KL 2
■
RHKL
HKL 2
■
18
RLM
RHLM
HLM
19
HLA
JK 2
■
HLA 1
JKL 2
■
20
LM
2
RE
15–100
REA
■
23
24
480 Vac
Asym.
Sym.
Asym.
Sym.
600 Vac
Asym.
125
(Single-Pole)
250 Vdc
—
10,000
10,000
—
—
—
—
—
—
7500 7500
7500
7500
—
—
—
—
—
—
5000
5000
15–20
—
—
—
10,000
10,000
—
—
—
—
—
—
REA
15–100
7500 7500
7500
7500
—
—
—
—
—
—
5000
5000
REH
15–100
—
—
18,000
20,000
10,000
10,000
14,000
15,000
—
—
—
10,000
RF
15–100
—
—
18,000
20,000
—
—
14,000
15,000
14,000
15,000
—
10,000
RFA
15–150
—
—
18,000
20,000
—
—
14,000
15,000
14,000
15,000
—
10,000
RHF
15–100
—
—
65,000
75,000
—
—
25,000
30,000
18,000
20,000
—
20,000
RHFA
15–100
—
—
65,000
75,000
—
—
25,000
30,000
18,000
20,000
—
20,000
RJ
70–225
—
—
22,000
25,000
—
—
18,000
20,000
14,000
15,000
—
10,000
HLA
70–225
—
—
42,000
50,000
—
—
30,000
35,000
22,000
25,000
—
20,000
HLA
125–400
—
—
42,000
50,000
—
—
30,000
35,000
22,000
25,000
—
20,000
RK
70–225
—
—
42,000
50,000
—
—
22,000
25,000
22,000
25,000
—
10,000
RKL
125–400
—
—
42,000
50,000
—
—
30,000
35,000
22,000
25,000
—
20,000
RLM
125–800
—
—
42,000
50,000
—
—
30,000
35,000
22,000
25,000
—
20,000
RHK
70–225
—
—
65,000
75,000
—
—
35,000
40,000
25,000
30,000
—
20,000
RHKL
125–400
—
—
65,000
75,000
—
—
35,000
40,000
25,000
30,000
—
20,000
RHLM
125–800
—
—
65,000
75,000
—
—
35,000
40,000
25,000
30,000
—
20,000
—
RHF3100 is a newly
manufactured, three-pole,
100A trip panelboard
replacement breaker for an
out-of-production HF3100.
R
■
Designates new
panelboard “only”
replacement breaker.
HF Identifies the out-ofproduction circuit
breaker frame.
Number of poles.
100 Trip ampere rating.
22
277 (Single-Pole)
Sym.
—
3
21
—
An Example:
HF
RJ
2
—
■
■
RHF
1
15–20
■
■
1
RE
Replacement of all out-ofproduction panelboard circuit
breakers are designated by
the easily identifiable addition
of an ”R“ prefix to the
out-of-production circuit
breaker catalog number
that they replace.
■
1
3
Notes:
1. Panelboard “only”
replacement circuit
breakers have noninterchangeable trip
units and the same
interrupting capacity
as the out-of-production
circuit breakers that
they replace.
2. The RE breaker has
off-center terminals
just like the E breaker
it is replacing.
3. For out-of-production
breakers, the “B” suffix
denotes 277 Vac rating
for the panelboard
replacement breaker.
(Example: RE3020B)
4. Some panelboard “only”
replacement breakers do
not have the same
physical dimensions or
mounting holes as the
breakers that they
replace. For example, the
types REH and RHFA are
6.00 inches in length
and the breakers that
they replace, EH and HFA,
are 6.50 inches in length.
Mounting hardware
is provided with each
breaker to resolve these
differences, and must be
installed to ensure a
proper fit.
5. Panelboard “only”
replacement breakers
can be installed in the
following styles of out-ofproduction Westinghouse
panelboards:
6. ABH
A2B
NHEB
NA1B
NA1B-LX
NDP
Notes
1 Last manufacture date—1974.
2 Last manufacture date—1967.
3 These frames are obsolete. For
replacement solutions, see the crossreference on Pages V12-T3-114–
V12-T3-167 or call 803-481-6843 for
other panelboard solutions.
25
V12-T3-80
NEB
NHDP
NH1B
NLAB-AB
NLAB-ABH
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
3
Panelboard “Only” Replacement Circuit Breaker Guide—Dimensions in Inches (Per Three-Pole Breaker)
1
Maximum Amperes
Description
100A
225A
2
Current Design
Panelboard ”only“
replacement circuit breakers
These circuit breakers, when used in a
panelboard, are direct replacements for
the circuit breakers listed below both
electrically and physically.
RE 1, REA 2
REH
RFA 3, RHFA
RF 4, RHF
3
4
5
6
7
Width: 4.13
Height: 6.00
Depth: 3.38
Width: 4.13
Height: 6.00
Depth: 3.38
Width: 4.13
Height: 6.00
Depth: 3.38
Width: 4.13
Height: 9.38
Depth: 3.81
EH
FA, HFA
F, HF
8
9
Out-of-Production Westinghouse Circuit Breakers
These circuit breakers
are no longer manufactured
These circuit breakers, when used
in a panelboard, are directly replaced
by the circuit breakers listed above.
*Indicates last date of manufacture.
E, EA
10
11
*1974
*1974
*1974
*1974
Width: 4.13
Height: 6.00
Depth: 3.38
Width: 4.13
Height: 6.50
Depth: 3.38
Width: 4.13
Height: 6.50
Depth: 3.38
Width: 4.13
Height: 9.38
Depth: 3.81
12
13
Notes
1 Obsolete—no replacement.
2 Obsolete—use REH (available in three-pole only).
3 Obsolete—use RHFA (available in three-pole only).
4 Obsolete—use RHF (available in three-pole only).
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
V12-T3-81
3
1
2
3
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
Panelboard “Only” Replacement Circuit Breaker Guide—Dimensions in Inches (Per Three-Pole Breaker), continued
Maximum Amperes
225A
400A
400A
800A
RJ
RK 1, RHK
RKL 2, RHKL
RLM 3, RHLM
Width: 8.25
Height: 10.13
Depth: 4.06
Width: 8.25
Height: 15.50
Depth: 4.06
Width: 8.25
Height: 16.00
Depth: 4.06
Width: 8.25
Height: 22.00
Depth: 5.50
KL, HKL
LM, HLM
Current Design
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Out-of-Production Westinghouse Circuit Breakers
J
K, HK
13
14
15
16
17
18
*1967
*1967
*1967
*1967
Width: 8.25
Height: 10.13
Depth: 4.06
Width: 8.25
Height: 15.50
Depth: 4.06
Width: 8.25
Height: 16.00
Depth: 4.06
Width: 8.25
Height: 22.00
Depth: 5.50
19
Further Information
Publication Number
Description
20
IL 15558
Mounting information for the RE, REA breakers
IL 15559
Mounting information for the RF, RHF breakers
21
IL 15562
Mounting information for the REH, RFA, RHFA breakers
IL 15563
Mounting information for the RJ breaker
22
IL 15564
Mounting information for the RK, RHK breakers
IL 15565
Mounting information for the RKL, RHKL breakers
23
IL 15566
Mounting information for the RLM, RHLM breakers
24
Notes
1 Obsolete—use RHK (available in three-pole only).
2 Obsolete—use RHKL (available in three-pole only).
3 Obsolete—use RHLM (available in three-pole only).
25
V12-T3-82
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
3
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
■
Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products
and services. 1
Type REA, Single-, Two- and Three-Pole,
Type REA
240 Vac Maximum, Thermal-Magnetic
Continuous
Ampere
Rating at 40°C
Type REH
Single-Pole,
120 Vac
Two-Pole,
240 Vac
Three-Pole,
240 Vac
Maximum Amperes
Wire Type
Wire Range
Style Number 2
1
2
Standard Pressure Type Terminals
20 (EB, EHB)
Al/Cu
#14–#10
624B100G14
100
Al/Cu
#14–1/0
624B100G02
150
Al/Cu
#4–4/0
624B100G17
10
REA1010
—
—
Optional Al/Cu Pressure Terminals
15
REA1015
REA2015
REA3015
50
Al/Cu
#14–#4
624B100G10
20
REA1020
REA2020
REA3020
100
Al/Cu
#4–4/0
624B100G17
25
REA1025
REA2025
REA3025
30
REA1030
REA2030
REA3030
40
REA1040
REA2040
REA3040
50
REA1050
REA2050
REA3050
60
REA1060
REA2060
REA3060
70
REA1070
REA2070
REA3070
80
REA1080
REA2080
REA3080
90
REA1090
REA2090
REA3090
100
REA1100
REA2100
REA3100
Type REH, Single-, Two- and Three-Pole,
480 Vac Maximum, Thermal-Magnetic
Continuous
Ampere
Rating at 40°C
Type RE
Catalog Number
Terminals
Catalog Number
Single-Pole,
277 Vac
Two-Pole,
480 Vac
Three-Pole,
480 Vac
10
REH1010
—
—
5
REH1015
REH2015
REH3015
20
REH1020
REH2020
REH3020
25
REH1025
REH2025
REH3025
30
REH1030
REH2030
REH3030
40
REH1040
REH2040
REH3040
50
REH1050
REH2050
REH3050
60
REH1060
REH2060
REH3060
70
REH1070
REH2070
REH3070
80
REH1080
REH2080
REH3080
90
REH1090
REH2090
REH3090
100
REH1100
REH2100
REH3100
5
All accessories and modifications available for Replacement
Breakers Types EB, EHB and FB are also available for
Panelboard Replacement Breakers Types RE, REH, RFA,
RF, RHF, REA and RHFA.
6
For accessories and modifications, refer to Pages V12-T3-65–
V12-T3-79.
Terminals
See table on Page V12-T3-83.
50°C Calibration
Add suffix “V” to catalog number for breakers to be used in
50°C ambients. Same price as standard 40°C breakers.
Note: Not UL Listed.
Notes
1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on
Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167 or call 803-481-6843 for other panelboard solutions.
2 Package of three.
Two-Pole,
240 Vac
Three-Pole,
240 Vac
10
RE1010
—
—
15
RE1015
RE2015
RE3015
20
RE1020
RE2020
RE3020
25
RE1025
RE2025
RE3025
30
RE1030
RE2030
RE3030
40
RE1040
RE2040
RE3040
50
RE1050
RE2050
RE3050
60
RE1060
RE2060
RE3060
70
RE1070
RE2070
RE3070
80
RE1080
RE2080
RE3080
90
RE1090
RE2090
RE3090
100
RE1100
RE2100
RE3100
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Catalog Number
Single-Pole,
120 Vac
4
Accessories and Modifications
Type RE, Single-, Two- and Three-Pole,
240 Vac Maximum, Thermal-Magnetic
Continuous
Ampere
Rating at 40°C
3
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
V12-T3-83
3
1
■
Replacement Capabilities
Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1
Panelboard Replacement Circuit Breakers (Includes Terminals on Load Side Only)
Continuous Ampere
Rating at 40°C
2
3
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Catalog Number
Two-Pole, 600 Vac
Three-Pole, 600 Vac
Type RFA Two-, Three-Pole, 600 Vac Maximum, Thermal-Magnetic
Type RFA
15
RFA2015
RFA3015
20
RFA2020
RFA3020
25
RFA2025
RFA3025
30
RFA2030
RFA3030
5
35
RFA2035
RFA3035
40
RFA2040
RFA3040
6
50
RFA2050
RFA3050
60
RFA2060
RFA3060
7
70
RFA2070
RFA3070
80
RFA2080
RFA3080
8
90
RFA2090
RFA3090
100
RFA2100
RFA3100
9
125
RFA2125
RFA3125
150
RFA2150
RFA3150
4
10
Type RF
Type RF Two-, Three-Pole, 600 Vac Maximum, Thermal-Magnetic
15
RF2015
RF3015
11
20
RF2020
RF3020
25
RF2025
RF3025
12
30
RF2030
RF3030
35
RF2035
RF3035
40
RF2040
RF3040
50
RF2050
RF3050
60
RF2060
RF3060
70
RF2070
RF3070
80
RF2080
RF3080
90
RF2090
RF3090
100
RF2100
RF3100
13
14
15
16
Type RHFA
Type RHFA Two-, Three-Pole, 600 Vac Maximum, Thermal-Magnetic
15
RHFA2015
RHFA3015
17
20
RHFA2020
RHFA3020
25
RHFA2025
RHFA3025
18
30
RHFA2030
RHFA3030
35
RHFA2035
RHFA3035
19
40
RHFA2040
RHFA3040
50
RHFA2050
RHFA3050
20
60
RHFA2060
RHFA3060
70
RHFA2070
RHFA3070
21
80
RHFA2080
RHFA3080
90
RHFA2090
RHFA3090
22
100
RHFA2100
RHFA3100
125
RHFA2125
RHFA3125
23
150
RHFA2150
RHFA3150
Note
1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167 or call 803-481-6843 for other panelboard solutions.
24
25
V12-T3-84
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
■
3
Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1
Panelboard Replacement Circuit Breakers (Includes Terminals on Load Side Only)
Continuous Ampere
Rating at 40°C
1
Catalog Number
Two-Pole, 600 Vac
Three-Pole, 600 Vac
2
3
Type RHF Two-, Three-Pole, 600 Vac Maximum, Thermal-Magnetic
Type RHF
Type RJ
Type RK
Type RKL
15
RHF2015
RHF3015
20
RHF2020
RHF3020
25
RHF2025
RHF3025
30
RHF2030
RHF3030
40
RHF2040
RHF3040
50
RHF2050
RHF3050
60
RHF2060
RHF3060
70
RHF2070
RHF3070
80
RHF2080
RHF3080
90
RHF2090
RHF3090
100
RHF2100
RHF3100
8
9
4
5
6
7
Type RJ Two-, Three-Pole, 600 Vac Maximum, Thermal-Magnetic
70
RJ2070
RJ3070
90
RJ2090
RJ3090
100
RJ2100
RJ3100
125
RJ2125
RJ3125
150
RJ2150
RJ3150
175
RJ2175
RJ3175
200
RJ2200
RJ3200
225
RJ2225
RJ3225
225 MCS
RJ2225K
RJ3225K
10
11
12
13
Type RK Two-, Three-Pole, 600 Vac Maximum, Thermal-Magnetic
70
RK2070
RK3070
90
RK2090
RK3090
100
RK2100
RK3100
125
RK2125
RK3125
150
RK2150
RK3150
175
RK2175
RK3175
200
RK2200
RK3200
225
RK2225
RK3225
225 MCS
RK2225K
RK3225K
14
15
16
17
18
Type RKL Two-, Three-Pole, 600 Vac Maximum, Thermal-Magnetic
125
RKL2125
RKL3125
150
RKL2150
RKL3150
175
RKL2175
RKL3175
200
RKL2200
RKL3200
225
RKL2225
RKL3225
250
RKL2250
RKL3250
300
RKL2300
RKL3300
350
RKL2350
RKL3350
400
RKL2400
RKL3400
400 MCS
RKL2400K
RKL3400K
19
20
21
22
Note
1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167 or call 803-481-6843 for other panelboard solutions.
23
24
25
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
V12-T3-85
3
1
■
Replacement Capabilities
Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1
Panelboard Replacement Circuit Breakers (Includes Terminals on Load Side Only)
Continuous Ampere
Rating at 40°C
2
3
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Catalog Number
Two-Pole, 600 Vac
Three-Pole, 600 Vac
Type RLM Two-, Three-Pole, 600 Vac Maximum, Thermal-Magnetic
Type RLM
125
RLM2125
RLM3125
150
RLM2150
RLM3150
175
RLM2175
RLM3175
200
RLM2200
RLM3200
5
225
RLM2225
RLM3225
250
RLM2250
RLM3250
6
275
RLM2275
RLM3275
300
RLM2300
RLM3300
7
350
RLM2350
RLM3350
400
RLM2400
RLM3400
8
500
RLM2500
RLM3500
600
RLM2600
RLM3600
9
600 MCS
RLM2600K
RLM3600K
700
RLM2700
RLM3700
800
RLM2800
RLM3800
4
10
Type RHK
Type RHK Two-, Three-Pole, 600 Vac Maximum, Thermal-Magnetic
11
70
RHK2070
RHK3070
90
RHK2090
RHK3090
12
100
RHK2100
RHK3100
125
RHK2125
RHK3125
150
RHK2150
RHK3150
175
RHK2175
RHK3175
200
RHK2200
RHK3200
225
RHK2225
RHK3225
225 MCS
RHK2225K
RHK3225K
13
14
15
Type RHKL
Type RHKL Two-, Three-Pole, 600 Vac Maximum, Thermal-Magnetic
125
RHKL2125
RHKL3125
16
150
RHKL2150
RHKL3150
175
RHKL2175
RHKL3175
17
200
RHKL2200
RHKL3200
225
RHKL2225
RHKL3225
18
250
RHKL2250
RHKL3250
300
RHKL2300
RHKL3300
19
350
RHKL2350
RHKL3350
400
RHKL2400
RHKL3400
20
400 MCS
RHKL2400K
RHKL3400K
Note
1 These frames are obsolete. For replacement solutions, see the cross-reference on Pages V12-T3-114–V12-T3-167 or call 803-481-6843 for other panelboard solutions.
21
22
23
24
25
V12-T3-86
Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions CA08100014E—October 2016 www.eaton.com
3
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Replacement Capabilities
■
Shaded area denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services. 1
Panelboard Replacement Circuit Breakers (Includes Terminals on Load Side Only)
Type RHLM
1
Catalog Number
Continuous Ampere
Rating at 40°C
Two-Pole, 600 Vac
Three-Pole, 600 Vac
2
3
Type RHLM Two-, Three-Pole, 600 Vac Maximum, Thermal-Magnetic
125
RHLM2125
RHLM3125
150
RHLM2150
RHLM3150
175
RHLM2175
RHLM3175
200
RHLM2200
RHLM3200
225
RHLM2225
RHLM3225
250
RHLM2250
RHLM3250
275
RHLM2275
RHLM3275
300
RHLM2300
RHLM3300
325
RHLM2325
RHLM3325
350
RHLM2350
RHLM3350
400
RHLM2400
RHLM3400
450
RHLM2450
RHLM3450
500
RHLM2500
RHLM3500
550
RHLM2550
RHLM3550
600
RHLM2600
RHLM3600
600 MCS
RHLM2600K
RHLM3600K
700
RHLM2700
RHLM3700
800
RHLM2800
RHLM3800
Accessories and
Modifications
All accessories and
modifications available for
replacement breakers types
KA, LA and MA are also
available for panelboard
replacement breakers types
RJ, RK, RKL, RLM, RHK,
RHKL and RHLM.
For additional accessories
and modifications, refer to
Pages V12-T3-65–
V12-T3-79.
Terminals
50°C Calibration
Add suffix “V” to catalog
number for breakers to be
used in 50°C ambients.
Same price as standard
40°C breakers.
Note: Not UL Listed.
Special Breakers
Magnetic only (includes
load terminals). Available
for all ampere ratings for
two- and three-pole RJ,
RK, RKL, RLM, RHK, RHKL
and RHLM.
RJ
TA225LA1
High magnetic moldedcase switches (K suffix) are
available to replace out-ofproduction non-automatic
breakers (N suffix).
RK
TA225LA1
Note: Not UL Listed.
RHK
TA225LA1
RKL
TA400LA1
Panelboard
Circuit
Breakers
RHKL
Terminals 2
RLM
TA700MA1 (for
工商网监
湘ICP备2023018690号
